Home

750COM-UM008 - Literature Library

1. Bit Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OxFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OxFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OxFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OxFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance OxFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance OxFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance OxFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OxFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OxFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OxFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 Decimals BitO These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum number of decimal places to be 17 Max Decimals Bit 1 displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates to not limit the number of decimal places used 18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference Reference 1 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect
2. toad 92 Chapter 6 About Explicit ico EAR MEO ERR HS 99 Performing Explicit Messaging viue os terrens Rebecca lube 100 ControlLogix Controller Examples eec eco RAE RE een 101 Chapter 7 Understanding the Status Indicators erede Rv eed 113 Indications for Adapter Mode Operation 114 Indications for Tap Mode Operation 116 Viewing Option Module Diagnostic Items 118 Viewing and Clearing Events inka et Ete er ern 122 Chapter 8 Enabling the Option Module Web 125 Viewing Web Pages in Adapter 125 Adapter Mode Process Display Pop up Dialog 128 Adapter Mode TCP IP Configuration Web 129 Adapter Mode Configure E mail Notification Web Page 130 Adapter Mode Device Information 133 Viewing Web Pages in Tap Mode 136 Appendix COMMUNICATION e ose a a a I da NONI EI DIS 137 El ctrical Bos or eee eorr tete duet i DS 138 Mechanical 2 22 eIDIBR 138 Environmental 0 ccc cece cece cece Hen 138 Regulatory Compliantes 22s do Cer teed s ente 138 Appendix B Parameter Types epu Etre Reese ERE 139 About Parameter Numbers eene 140 How Parameters Are Organized E 140 Parameters for Adapter Mo
3. Code Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text Gees The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the DPI Parameter Object in the option module Service Type m Get Attribute Single This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code e Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 4 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 7 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 9 Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Source Element Leave blank not applicable Source Length 0 bytes Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Output Current 6 Thetag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My PowerFlex 755 Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Read Message The namefor the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0
4. sce dax dee Rhen fe Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy Adapter made Only eiie ry cay vars ace ies ew REN eid Setting a Fault Action Adapter mode only Setting Web Page ede uci ce e ded Resetting the Option Module as dius ele ee bee op Restoring Option Module Parameters to Factory Defaults Viewing the Option Module Status Using Parameters Updating the Option Module Firmware Chapter 4 Using RSLinx Classic e xe Re epa Uploading the Electronic Data Sheet EDS File ControlLogix Controller Example Adapter mode only Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Table of Contents Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Troubleshooting Viewing Option Module Web Pages Specifications Option Module Parameters Chapter 5 About I O Messaging o ca rd iX bars 87 Understanding the I O Saas nares 88 Using Logie Gommand Status si 25355450 CART MES 89 Using enema er dete 89 Using conrad ei qe snis toic decida s dieta iol a rev rd A 90 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 91 Control Logix Controller
5. Details Values Type Minimum Maximum Type Default Values Type Reset Required Values Type Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required 0 Adapter 1 Read Only 4 6 Read Only 3 DHCP 1 Parameters 2 BOOTP 3 DHCP Read Write Yes 0 Switches 1 Parameters 2 BOOTP 3 DHCP Read Only 0 c 0 255 Read Write Yes Parameter No 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 Name and Description Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Sets the subnet mask bytes for the option module s network address when Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters and the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are not being used that is switches set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Sets the gateway address bytes for the option module s network address when Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters and the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are not being used that is switches set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Net Rate Cfg 1 Sets the speed and duplex
6. BB gt ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove all power from the PowerFlex drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the option module ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Only personnel familiar with drive and power products and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup configuration and subsequent maintenance of the drive using the option module Failure to comply may result in injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The option module contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the option module If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 2 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the option module is transmitting control 1 0 to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the option module Determine how your drive will respond before resetting the module ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Host Parameters 33 Comm Fit Action 34 Idle Fit Action 35 Peer Fit Action and 36 Msg Flt Action let you determine the action of the option module and connected drive i
7. 4 Click OK when finished TIP When using version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs there is no need to perform step 5 through step 9 Instead skip to step 10 5 Click the Drive tab Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 71 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 6 Click the Port Properties icon cs to open the Properties dialog box PowerFlex 753 Properties General Status and Feedback Type PowerFlex 753 Process Display Component Detais There are two checkboxes related to ADC Checkbox Selection Enable Automatic Device Configuration Description See the Important note on page 68 and depending on the Drive AOP version being used Version 4 01 Drive Add on Profiles AOPs on page 68 or Version 4 02 or later Drive Add on Profiles AOPs on page 69 for additional information about ADC use and Logix behavior ADC is disabled when unchecked or enabled when checked Fail Drive Connection on Peripheral Error This selection is available only for peripherals If you want to be sure that the correct peripheral is present with the correct configuration before the controller connects to the drive check this box If the peripheral is not essential to your use of the drive for example a HIM that may or may not be present all of the time uncheck this box Note that when a failure occurs RSLogix software will show both a configuration on Port 0 drive and Port xx peripheral erro
8. Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OxFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OxFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OxFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OXFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OxFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance OxFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance OxFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance OxFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OxFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OxFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OxFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum number of decimal places to be 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates to not limit the number of decimal places used 18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter Reference 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference 1 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a re
9. TIP To determine whether a parameter is a 32 bit integer DINT or a REAL data type see the Data Type column in the chapter containing parameters in the PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drives Programming Manual publication 750 PM001 If a parameter is a REAL a COP Copy instruction or UDDT is needed to copy the DINT to a REAL inputs or copy the REAL to a DINT outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 About Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use Explicit Messaging with a ControlLogix controller to configure and monitor the option module and connected PowerFlex 750 Series drive For explicit messaging with a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller see Controller Examples for EtherNet IP Network Communications with PowerFlex 750 Series Drives publication 75 gt 0COM AT001 Topic Page Performing Explicit Messaging 100 ControlLogix Controller Examples 101 publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists If Explicit Messages are N programmed to write parameter data to Nonvolatile Storage N
10. Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required If communication is disrupted and then is re established the drive will automatically receive commands over the network again Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters When setting Host Parameter 33 Comm Flt Action 34 Idle Flt Action 35 Peer Flt Action or 36 Msg Flt Action to Send Flt Cfg the values in the following parameters are sent to the drive after a communication fault idle fault peer I O fault and or explicit messaging for drive control fault occurs You must set these parameters to values required by your application Option Module Host Parameter Parameter 37 Flt Cfg Logic Description A 32 bit value sent to the drive for Logic Command Parameter 38 Fit Cfg Ref A 32 bit REAL floating point value sent to the drive for Reference Parameter 39 Flt Cfg DL 01 through Parameter 54 Flt Cfg DL 16 A 32 bit integer value sent to the drive for a Datalink If the destination of the Datalink is a REAL floating point parameter you must convert the desired value to the binary representation ofthe REAL value An internet search of hex to float provides a link to a tool to do this conversion Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 47 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Setting Web Page
11. Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Net Rate Cfg 1 Sets the speed and duplex network data rate at which the option module communicates on its ENET1 network port Updates Device Parameter 20 Net Rate Act 1 after a reset Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Read Write Yes 0 255 Read Write Yes 0 255 Read Write Yes 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Disabled Read Write Yes 141 Appendix 142 Option Module Parameters Parameter No 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Name and Description Net Rate Act 1 Displays the actual speed and duplex network data rate for the option modules ENET1 network port Net Rate Cfg 2 Sets the speed and duplex network data rate at which the option module communicates on its ENET2 network port Updates Device Parameter 22 Net Rate Act 2 after a reset Net Rate Act 2 Displays the actual speed and duplex network data rate for the option modules ENET2 network port Reserved Reserved Reset Module
12. Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Values Type 10 00 Seconds 0 01 Seconds 10 00 Seconds Read Write No c 0 255 Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Custom Read Write No 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted Read Only Parameter No 39 40 41 42 43 Name and Description DLs To Peer Cfg Sets the number of drive to peer Datalinks parameters that are used for peer 1 0 The Datalinks being used are allocated from the end of the list For example if this parameter s value is set to 3 Datalinks 14 16 are allocated for the 3 selected Datalinks The Datalinks allocated for this cannot overlap with other assigned DL To Net 01 16 parameters NOTE The option module allows the peer output configuration parameters to be written while peer outputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer outputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the option module is power cycled or reset DLs To Peer Act Displays the value of Device Parameter 39 DLs To Peer Cfg at the time the option module was reset This is the number of actual drive to peer Datalinks that the option module is expecting To Peer Per
13. Steady Normal operation The option module is properly connected and communicating on the network to a controller NETB Unlit Off Normal operation The option module is properly connected but is idle Green Flashing Normal operation The option module is properly connected DHCP is enabled and the option module is transmitting on the network After verifying correct operation swing down the drive HIM bezel to its closed position and install the drive cover For more details on status indicator operation see page 114 and page 115 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 27 Chapter2 Installing the Option Module Table 2 Tap Mode PowerFlex 755 Drive and Option Module Start Up Status Indications Item Name Color State Description STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Su Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing When running a type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to run When stopped a start inhibit condition exists and the drive cannot be started see drive parameter 933 Start Inhibits Steady A type 1 user configurable alarm condition exists but the drive continues to run Red Flashing A major fault has occurred Drive will stop Drive cannot be started until fault condition is cleared Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Red Flashing A minor fault has
14. 13 C3 3 C3 3 al C3 LI E M C2 Safety Safety devices must be unlocked and in program mode before Automatic Device Configuration can configure them After a configuration process has completed additional manual steps are required Set Password Ol ox The ADC Settings dialog box provides a single location for ADC configuration of the drives ports Global checkboxes at the top of each column checks or unchecks the entire column Ports can also be turned on off individually See the checkbox selection information in step 3 for additional details The Safety section in the lower part of the ADC Settings dialog box will only be displayed if a Safe Speed Monitor Module is present 12 Click OK when finished 13 Perform all previous steps for each additional PowerFlex 750 Series drive Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 73 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 14 Save your RSLogix 5000 project and download the project to the Logix controller IMPORTANT Note that some parameters can affect the minimum maximum of other parameters and can cause the settings of these parameters to be out of range This in turn will cause ADC to fail with a module fault code 16 0010 Mode or state of module does not allow object to perform requested service For example drive Parameters 520 Max Fwd Speed and 521 Max Rev Speed affect the minimum maximum of
15. 21503 Port 4 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 Port5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 Ox5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 16385 Most Recent Option Module Event 169 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision UINT Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Maximum number of faults events that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Fault Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear Fault Event 2 Clear Fault Event Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Trip Instance Read UINT Fault that tripped the device For Option Modules this value is always 1 when faulted 5 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved USINT USINT UINT n 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty 7 Get Fault Parameter Reference UINT Reserved Instance Attributes AttributeIlD AccessRule Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Inform
16. Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 1111 15 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit 4 Bit 16 is the least significant bit 17 Extended Data Type Bit 5 000 Reserved 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 001 UDINT used as an array of Boolean 010 Reserved 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Nota Link Source 0 May be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object Intelligent offline tools make use of the Limits Object to select limits and units 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix
17. For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 755 drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code Ox9F to determine the instance number 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name ofthe device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder for this example My PowerFlex 755 Drive 4 SeeTable 5 on page 100 for limitations of PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 5 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag To read a 32 bit integer parameter set the tag Data Type field to DINT For a 16 bit parameter set the Data Type field to INT See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter A Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 535 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Table 7 Example Controller Tags to Write a
18. Host PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Revision e Status e Commanded Direction Rotation Direction Process Status Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 127 Chapter8 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Ada pter Mode Process e d Pus Display pop up as ud e EE Display Pop up Dialog Box ost drive s information To view this dialog box click the Process display lin in the navigation pane Figure 39 Example of Adapter Mode Process Display Pop up Dialog Box C Rockwell Automation Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rock E BR Process Display Product Text PowerFlex 753 Status Faulted Commanded Direction Forward Rotation Direction Forward 0 000000 Hz 0 000000 Amps 0 000000 Bus VDC Process Status 0 000000 Out Vits 0 000000 Out Pwr 0 000000 Elp kWHr 0 000000 Trq Cur This page refreshes automatically every 3 seconds Information Description Product Text Description of host drive Status Status of host drive Commanded Direction Commanded direction of host drive Rotation Direction Rotation direction of host drive Process Status 1st Line Dynamic value of the host drive feedback parameter This parameter is not selectable Lines 2 through 7 Dynamic value of each default displayed host drive parameter The displayed drive parameters for lines 2 through 7 are selectable using a HIM DriveExecutive software or DriveExplorer software 128 Rock
19. Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Parameter Name and Description Option Module Parameters Appendix B 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Sets the IP address bytes for the option module s network address when Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters and the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are not being used that is switches set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 255 255 255 255 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Sets the subnet mask bytes for the option module s network address when Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters and the Node Address switches Figure 2 page 21 are not being used that is switches set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Sets the gateway address bytes for the option module s network address when Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters and the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are not being used that is switches set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2
20. Settings Description 888 Resets the option module network node address to factory defaults Thereafter the drive must be powered down the Node Address switches must be set to a correct value 001 254 and then the drive must be powered up again to accept the new address Any other Disables the Node Address switches and requires using Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel to setting select the source for the option module s network node address e 1 Parameters of the option module 2 BOOTP server 3 DHCP server default The Node Address switch settings can be verified by viewing Diagnostic Item number 73 page 120 or page 122 with a PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM 65 HIM DriveExplorer software or DriveExecutive software Also you can use Device Parameter 06 Net Addr Src a read only parameter to verify the selected setting for Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel IMPORTANT Remove power from the drive before installing the option module in the drive control pod The option module is connected to the drive differently depending on the mode in which the option module is operated When Operating in Adapter Mode Install the option module in the PowerFlex 750 Series drive control pod in Port 4 5 or 6 For more installation details see the Network Communication Option Card Installation Instructions publication 750COM IN002 provided with the option module IMPORTANT After inserting the option modu
21. 1 Set the value of Device Parameter 19 Net Rate Cfg 1 to the data rate at which your network is operating Value Data Rate 0 Autodetect defaul 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half TIP Auto detection of baud rate and duplex works properly only if the device usually a switch on the other end ofthe cable is also set to automatically detect the baud rate duplex If one device has the baud rate duplex hard coded the other device must be hard coded to the same settings If the option modules ENET2 network port will be used to connect another drive in a linear or DLR network topology set the value of Device Parameter 21 Net Rate Cfg 2 to the appropriate data rate 2 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy Adapter mode only Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 This procedure is only required if Datalinks are used to write or read data of the drive or its connected peripherals A hierarchy determines the type of device with which the option module exchanges data In a Master Slave hierarchy the option module exchanges data with a master such as a scanner or bridge In a Peer to Peer hierarchy the option module exchanges data with EtherNet IP Option Modules in other PowerFlex 750 Series drives For both Master Slave and
22. 11 Set Last Conflict Detected STRUCT of USINT ACD Activity USINT 6 Remote MAC USINT 28 ARP PDU 184 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Ethernet Link Object EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF6 246 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0 4 No Yes Get_and_Clear 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The adapter supports the following instances of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 ENET1 network port 2 ENET2 network port Class Attributes Attribute ID csse Name Datatype 1 UINT The revision of this object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT Speed in megabits per second Mbs 2 Get Interface Flags UDINT Bit Value 0 Link status 0 inactive 1 active 1 Duplex 0 half duplex 1 full duplex 2 31 Reserved 3 Get Physical Address USINT 6 MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX The first octet USINT 0 is on the left 4 Get Interface Counters STRUCT of UDINT Octets received UDINT Unicast packets received UDINT Non unicast packets received UDINT Inbound packets received but discarded UDINT Inbound packets with errors not discarded UDINT Inbound packets with unknown protocol UDINT Octets s
23. 16 Read Write Yes 0 16 Read Only 10 00 Seconds 0 01 Seconds 10 00 Seconds Read Write No 1 1 16 Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 Reserved 2 Custom Read Write No 145 Appendix 146 Option Module Parameters Host Parameters Adapter Mode Parameter No 01 02 03 04 05 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Name and Description DL From Net 01 DL From Net 02 DL From Net 03 DL From Net 04 DL From Net 05 DL From Net 06 DL From Net 07 DL From Net 08 DL From Net 09 DL From Net 10 DL From Net 11 DL From Net 12 DL From Net 13 DL From Net 14 DL From Net 15 DL From Net 16 Sets the port number and parameter number to which the selected Datalinks should connect Each selected port parameter will be written with data received from the network These are parameters written by the controller outputs from the controller If setting the value manually the parameter value 10000 port number destination parameter number For example suppose you want to use Host Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 to write to Parameter 01 of an optional encoder module plugged into drive Port 5 The value for Host Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 would be 50001 10000 5 1 DL To Net 01 DL To Net 02 DL To Net 03 DL To Net 04 DL To Net 05 DL To Net 06 DL To Net 07 DL To Net 08 DL To Net 09 DL To Net 10 DL
24. 16 DL Fr Net 06 Val 17 DL Fr Net 07 Val 18 DL Fr Net 08 Val 19 DL Fr Net 09 Val 20 DL Fr Net 10 Val 21 DL Fr Net 11 Val 22 DL Fr Net 12 Val 23 DL Fr Net 13 Val 24 DL Fr Net 14 Val 25 DL Fr Net 15 Val 26 DL Fr Net 16 Val 118 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Table 10 Adapter Mode Diagnostic Items Continued No Name Description 27 DL To Net 01 Val The present value of respective Host DL To Net xx parameter being received from the drive by this option ji module If not using a Datalink its respective value should be zero 29 DL To Net 03 Val 30 DL To Net 04 Val 31 DL To Net 05 Val 3 DL To Net 06 Val 33 DL To Net 07 Val 3 DL To Net 08 Val 35 DL To Net 09 Val 36 DL To Net 10 Val 37 DL To Net 11 Val 38 DL To Net 12 Val 39 DL To Net 13 Val 40 DL To Net 14 Val 41 DL To Net 15 Val 42 DL To Net 16 Val 43 DPI Rx Errs The present value of the DPI Receive error counter 44 DPI Rx Errs Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Receive error counter 45 DPI Tx Errs The present value of the DPI Transmit error counter 46 DPI Tx Errs Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Transmit error counter 47 SI Primary Err Number of CRC errors detected by the option module in the primary channel Logic Status and Feedback of the Serial Interface
25. BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Fie Tools Hep Request History Clear History Add to Relation List fhemiisec Type Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname 32256 BOOTP 0000BCB55F 37 1091 101 PF755 DLR Extruder 1 32203 BOOTP 0000B8CB55F37 32142 BOOTP 0000BCB55F37 9 21 33 BOOTP 00 00 8 85 5 37 9 21 32 BOOTP 00008CB855F 37 9 21 27 BOOTP 00 00 8 85 5 37 32126 BOOTP 0000B8CB55F37 Relation List New oe Ethemet Address MAC Type IP Address Hostname Description 0000 8C855F37 BOOTP 1091 9 101 PF7SSDLR Extruder1A Plant 1 Facity SC Status Sent 10 91 96 101 to Ethemet address 00 00 8C BS 5F 37 10 permanently assign this configuration to the option module select the device in the Relation List and click Disable BOOTP DHCP When power is cycled on the option module it will use the configuration you assigned it and not issue new BOOTP DHCP requests TIP To enable BOOTP or DHCP for an option module that has had BOOTP DHCP disabled first select the option module in the Relation List Then depending on the type of server click Enable BOOTP or Enable DHCP and lastly reset the option module or power cycle the drive 11 From the File menu choose Save to save the Relation List Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 35 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Using Option Module Parameters By default the option module is configured to use a DHCP
26. Bit 3 P2 Swapped Bit 4 P3 Normal Bit 5 P3 Swapped 75 Boot Flash Count Number of times the boot firmware in the option module has been upgraded 76 App Flash Count Number of times the application firmware in the option module has been upgraded 7 FPGA Flash Count Number of times the FPGA configuration in the option module has been upgraded Viewing and Clea ring Events The option module has an event queue to record significant events that occur in the operation of the module When such an event occurs an entry consisting of the event s numeric code and a timestamp is put into the event queue You can view the event queue with the PowerFlex 20 HIM AG or 20 HIM C6S HIM DriveExplorer software version 6 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 5 01 or later or other clients using the DPI Fault object For details on viewing and clearing events with the HIM see the PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual publication 20HIM UM001 The event queue can contain up to 32 entries which are stored in an EEPROM chip making the event queue nonvolatile Eventually the event queue will become full since its contents are retained through option module power cycles and resets At that point a new entry replaces the oldest entry Only an event queue clear operation or the corruption of the EEPROM group containing the event queue will clear the event queue contents In the latter case the option module
27. DD QD Option Module s ENET3 DEVICE Port bottom port from top of card PowerFlex 755 Drive Control Pod drive shown with cover removed Ethernet Port on PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter Short Ethernet Cable provided with option module spare part catalog number 1585 M8CBJM 0M3 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 25 Chapter2 Installing the Option Module Applying Power operation may occur if you fail to verify that parameter settings are compatible with your application Verify that settings are compatible with your application before applying power to the drive ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage injury or death exists Unpredictable Apply power to the drive The option module receives its power from the drive When you apply power to the option module for the first time its topmost status indicator PORT for Adapter mode or OK for Tap mode should be steady green or flashing green after an initialization If it is red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Start Up Status Indications After power has been applied the drive STS status indicator can be viewed on the front of the drive and the option module status indicators can be viewed with the drive cover open or removed Figure 7 The indicators operate differently in Adapter mode than Ta
28. HIM will prompt at startup 1 Language was selected no prompt Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 161 Appendix 162 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 20 Set Customer Generated Firmware STRING 36 GUID Globally Unique Identifier identifying customer firmware upgraded into the device 30 Get International Status Text STRINGN Text describing the status of device with support for Unicode 31 Get Set International User Definable Text STRINGN Text identifying the device with a user supplied name with support for Unicode 34 Get Key Information STRUCT of UDINT Rating Code UDINT Device Serial Number UINT Customization Code UINT Customization Revision UINT Brand Code USINT Family Code USINT Config Code USINT Language Code USINT Major Revision USINT Minor Revision USINT 16 Customer Generated Firmware UUID 35 Get NVS CRC UDINT A 32 bit CRC of the Nonvolatile Storage in a device 38 Set ADC Configuration Signature USINT 16 Value stored by the device and zeroed if its configuration changes 39 Get SI Driver Code UINT Code identifying the protocol between the device and host 128 Get Customization Code UINT Code identifying the customized device 129 Get Customization Revision Number UINT Revision ofthe customized device 130 Get Customization Device Text STRING 32 Text identifying t
29. Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 10 Korean 3 Get Product Series USINT 1 A 2 B 4 Get Number of Components USINT Number of components for example main control board 1 0 boards in the device 5 Set User Definable Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device with a user supplied name 6 Get Status Text STRING 12 Text describing the status of the device 7 Get Configuration Code USINT Identification of variations 8 Get Configuration Text STRING 16 Text identifying a variation of a family device 9 Get Brand Code UINT 0x0001 Allen Bradley 11 NVS Checksum UINT Checksum of the Nonvolatile Storage in a device 12 Get Class Revision UINT 2 DPI 13 Get Character Set Code USINT 0 SCANport HIM 1 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 2 150 8859 2 Latin 2 3 150 8859 3 Latin 3 4 ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 5 150 8859 5 Cyrillic 6 150 8859 6 Arabic 7 150 8859 7 Greek 8 150 8859 8 Hebrew 9 150 8859 9 Turkish 10 10 8859 10 Nordic 255 ISO 10646 Unicode 14 Product Option Support BOOL 64 15 Get Languages Supported STRUCT of USINT Number of Languages USINT n Language Codes see Class Attribute 2 16 Get Date of Manufacture STRUCT of UINT Year USINT Month USINT Day 17 Product Revision STRUCT of USINT Major Firmware Release USINT Minor Firmware Release 18 Get Serial Number UDINT Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 19 Set Language Selected USINT 0 Default
30. Set option module parameters for the following functions as required by your application e P address subnet mask and gateway address only when not using option module node address switches Datarate 1 0 configuration Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy Fault actions Web enable and features 7 Configure the controller to communicate with the option module Chapter 4 Configuring the 1 0 Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix software to configure onfiguring the master on the network to recognize the option module and drive 8 Create a ladder logic program Chapter 5 Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix software to create a ladder logic program that enables you to do the following Control the option module and connected drive by using 1 0 e Monitor or configure the drive by using Explicit messages Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only 15 Chapter 1 16 Getting Started Tap Mode of Operation only with PowerFlex 755 drives Step 1 Action Review the safety precautions for the option module See Throughout this manual 2 Verify that the PowerFlex drive is properly installed PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drive Installation Instructions publication 750 IN001 Set the option module IP address a When using the option
31. Type the following information in their respective boxes Information Description IP address of the address of the mail server that will be used to deliver the e mail messages When the IP address is unknown read the TIP shown below this table to determine the mail server address E mail addresses to notify Type in addresses to where you want e mail messages to be sent Multiple addresses can be used but they must be separated by commas comma delimited Subject of e mail message Typeinthe desired subject text for the e mail message TIP Ifthe IP address ofthe e mail server is unknown you can contact your IT department or use the following DOS command instructions to find its IP address a From the Start menu on the Windows task bar choose Run to display the Run dialog box b In the Run dialog box Open field type cmd c Click OK to display the DOS dialog box d On the c gt command line type nslookup name of e mail server The entry c gt nslookup smtp company com is an example e Press ENTER to display the e mail server IP address Figure 42 f Typethe second bottom IP address shown in the DOS dialog box forthis example 131 200 165 58 into the E mail Notification Web Page Figure 41 Figure 42 DOS Dialog Box Example Showing E mail Server IP Address cx C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe C gt nslookup smtp rockwell com Serve usmnkemnul
32. USINT Standard week USINT Standard hour USINT Standard minute USINT Standard second INT Daylight offset USINT Daylight month USINT Daylight day of week USINT Daylight week USINT Daylight hour USINT Daylight minute USINT Daylight second 9 Get Set Custom Time Zone Data Struct of INT Standard bias USINT Standard month USINT Standard day of week USINT Standard week USINT Standard hour USINT Standard minute USINT Standard second INT Daylight offset USINT Daylight month USINT Daylight day of week USINT Daylight week USINT Daylight hour USINT Daylight minute USINT Daylight second Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Read Full STRUCT of STRING 16 Name of the timer LWORD or STRUCT Elapsed time in milliseconds unless timer is a real time clock see attribute 2 BOOL 16 See Attribute 3 1 Get Timer Text STRING 16 Name of the timer 2 Get Set Timer Value LWORD or Elapsed time in milliseconds unless the timer is a real time clock STRUCT of Real Time Clock Data UINT Milliseconds 0 999 USINT Seconds 0 59 USINT Minutes 0 59 USINT Hours 0 23 USINT Days 1 31 USINT Months 1 January 12 December USINT Years since 1972 3 Get Timer Descriptor BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 4 Get International Read Full Struct of STRINGN International timer text STRUCT Timer value B
33. then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set 26 NotWritable WhilelO This parameter cannot be written if the 1 0 data being exchanged between the Host and the peripheral is valid Active 27 Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 167 Appendix 168 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Bit Description 28 Current Value I
34. to be sure that it properly follows the master drive s speed reference and commanded direction Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 so that changes to Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg take effect Set Device Parameter 37 Fr Peer Enable to a value of 2 Custom Value Setting 0 Off Default 1 Cmd Ref 2 Custom Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 45 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Setting a Fault Action By default when communication is disrupted for example the network cable is Adapter mode only disconnected the controller is idle in program mode or faulted and or peer I O or explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted the drive responds by faulting if it is using I O from the network You can configure a different response to these events A Disrupted I O communication by using Host Parameter 33 Comm Flt Action An idle controller by using Host Parameter 34 Idle Flt Action Disrupted peer I O by using Host Parameter 35 Peer Flt Action Disrupted explicit messaging for drive control via PCCC the CIP Register Object or the CIP Assembly object by using Host Parameter 36 Msg Flt Action ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Host Parameters 33 Comm Fit Action 34 Idle Fit Action 35 Peer Fit Action and 36 Msg FIt Action respectively let you determine th
35. 1 001 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Programming Manual publication 750 PM001 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Technical Data publication 750 TD001 Information on installing programming and technical data of PowerFlex 750 Series drives PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual publication 20HIM UM001 Information on the installation and use of PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM 65 HIMs Getting Results with RSLinx Guide publication LINX GR001 and online help 2 Information on using RSLinx Classic software RSLogix 5000 PIDE Autotuner Getting Results Guide publication PIDE GRO01 and online help 9 Information on using the RSLogix 5000 software tool EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UM001 Information on using the ControlLogix 1756 EN2TR or 1756 EN3TR EtherNet IP communication modules with your Logix5000 controller and communicating with various devices on the EtherNet IP network Controller Examples for EtherNet IP Network Communications with PowerFlex 750 Series Drives publication 750COM ATO01 Information on using PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 1400 controllers with PowerFlex 750 Series drives that are equipped with a 20 750 ENETR Dual port EtherNet IP option module or embedded EtherNet IP adapter PowerFlex 755 drive only 1 Use this link to the ODVA EtherNet IP library http odva org Home ODVATECHNOLOGIES E
36. 11 RSLogix 5000 software will go to the Offline state and the following dialog box will appear RSLogix 5000 A The Store operation is in progress and could take up to 3 minutes to complete You will be unable to reconnect unti the Store is complete Wait a short period of time for the store operation to complete and then attempt to go online with the controller again Special Considerations When Using a DeviceLogix Program There are special considerations when a PowerFlex 750 Series drive has ADC enabled and is running a DeviceLogix program ADC will download the DeviceLogix program after the drive is replaced but by default the program will be disabled not running since the factory default setting is Logic disabled for a new replacement drive If you want the DeviceLogix program to be enabled run after ADC you have to configure the drive in your project to do this by performing the following steps 1 Select the PowerFlex 750 Series drive and click the Drive tab 2 Select the DeviceLogix Port in the device tree 3 Click the DeviceLogix icon to open the DeviceLogix Editor 4 From the Edit menu choose Recovery Mode Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the O Chapter 4 5 Click Enabled to enable DeviceLogix after ADC When this device has its configuration automatically restored by a master Logic Execution will be O Disabled Enabled If you do not s
37. 126 Viewing Option Module Web Pages The computer can access option module web pages if it is connected to e The same network as the drive option module e network with access to the drive option module network via a gateway device for example a router In the Address box type the IP address of the option module Press ENTER The option module Adapter mode web Home Page Figure 38 appears IMPORTANT From the browser s View menu choose Refresh to always re display the option module Home Page while viewing any of the module s other web pages Figure 38 Adapter Mode Web Home Page Example 2 Rockwel Automation Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation II IT C smS m T ca n 7 EtherNet IP ENETR Adapter 0 process display Adapter EtherNet IP ENETR TCP IP configuration 2 configure e mail notific Browse DPI devices Online user manuals Software tools Web sit Launch my Onve xplore SS Launch my orveExecuti LC E mail technical support Host Powerflex 753 Title Bar on Adapter Mode Web Pages The title bar appears on the option module Adapter mode Home Page and all of the modules other Adapter mode web pages The title bar consists of three elements as shown in Figure 38 Title Bar Element Description Allen Bradley logo This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the ab com web Home Page Option Module Title Shows the option module type
38. 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit4 Bit 16 isthe least significant bit 17 Extended Data Type Bit5 000 Reserved 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 001 UDINT used as an array of Boolean 010 Reserved 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 NotUsed Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 NotaLink Source 0 May be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object Intelligent offline tools make use of the Limits Object to select limits and units 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Extended Descriptor Attributes
39. 3 Link USINT Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor UDINT Extended Descriptor see page 167 22 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Read Full BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad word always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset BOOL 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter va to be sure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page 168 3 Do NOT continually write parameter data to NVS See the attention page 99 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 ue If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINE
40. 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 755 drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code 0x9F to determine the instance number 3 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A will write the parameter value to temporary memory so the parameter value will be lost after the drive is power cycled It is recommended to use the A setting when frequent write messages are required 4 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder for this example My PowerFlex 755 Drive 5 See Table 5 on page 100 for limitations of PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 6 Inthis example Accel Time 1 is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag To write to a 32 hit integer parameter set the tag Data Type field to DINT For a 16 bit parameter set the Data Type field to INT Also
41. Act 4 Gateway Act Gateway Act 2 Gateway Act 3 Gateway Act 4 67 Net Rx Overruns The number of receive buffer overruns reported by the Ethernet hardware 68 Net Rx Packets The number of Ethernet packets that the option module has received 69 Net Rx Errors The number of receive errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 70 Net Tx Packets The number of Ethernet packets that the option module has sent 71 Net Tx Errors The number of transmit errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 72 Missed IO Pkts The number of incoming 1 0 connection packets that the option module did not receive 73 Net Addr Sw The present value of the option module node address rotary switches 74 MDIX Status Indicates the type of cable connected to the option module s ports P1 ENET1 network port and P2 ENET2 network port Bit 0 P1 Normal Bit 1 P1 Swapped Bit 2 P2 Normal Bit 3 P2 Swapped 75 Boot Flash Count Number of times the boot firmware in the option module has been upgraded 76 App Flash Count Number of times the application firmware in the option module has been upgraded 7 FPGA Flash Count Number of times the FPGA configuration in the option module has been upgraded Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Diagnostic Items for Tap Mode Operation Table 11 Tap Mode Diagnostic Items No Name Description 1 Common Logic Cmd The present value of the
42. BOOTP Use BOOTP when you want to configure a temporary IP address subnet mask and gateway address for the option module using a BOOTP server To use BOOTP as the source for the IP address the Node Address switches must be set to a value other than 001 254 or 888 and Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel must be set to 2 BOOTP Note the option module s hardware Ethernet Address MAC on the module s data nameplate label located on the backside of the circuit board which will be used in step 7 when configuring the BOOTP server see Using a BOOTP or DHCP Server page 32 for details Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Installing the Option Module Chapter 2 TIP If the PowerFlex 750 Series drive is connected to a Stratix 6000 or Stratix 8000 managed Ethernet switch and the drive is set for BOOTP mode the dynamic IP address assignment by port Stratix 6000 or DHCP persistence Stratix 8000 feature will set the IP address for the drive For more details see the Stratix 6000 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual publication 1783 UM001 or the Stratix 8000 and Stratix 8300 Ethernet Managed Switches User Manual publication 1783 UM003 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use DHCP the default when you want additional flexibility and ease of use compared to BOOTP in configuring the IP address subnet mask and gateway address for the option module using a DHCP server To u
43. Command and Logic Status words that are used for PowerFlex 750 Series drives Logic Command Word Logic Bits 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1009 8 7 6 5 413 2 1 0 Command Description X Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop Normal Stop X Start 7 0 Not Start Start Jog 12 0 Not Jog 1 Par 556 Jog1 x Clear Fault 9 0 Not Clear Fault Clear Fault x x Unipolar Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 0 Reverse Command 1 Hold Direction Control x Manual 0 Not Manual Manual x eserved x Accel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 Par 535 0 Use Accel Time 2 Par 536 Use Present Time x ecel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 Par 537 0 Use Decel Time 2 Par 538 Use Present Time X ef Select 1 000 No Command x ef Select 2 001 Ref A Select Par 545 as 00 Preset 4 Par 574 01 Preset 5 Par 575 0 Preset 6 Par 576 1 Preset 7 Par 577 X served x Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop Coast to Stop x Current Limit Stop 0 Not Current Limit Stop Current Limit Stop X un 9 0 Not Run Run x og 2 Q 0 Not Jog 2 Par 557 Jog2 x eserve x eserve X
44. Corrective Action Off The option module is not properly connected to the network Securely connect the option module to the network using an Ethernet cable Also make sure the Ethernet cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet connector Steady Green ENET3 network port has a 100 Mbps network link but no activity No action required Flashing Green ENET3 network port has a 100 Mbps network link with activity No action required Steady Yellow ENET3 network port has a 10 Mbps network link but no activity No action required Flashing Yellow ENET3 network port has a 10 Mbps network link with activity No action required Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 17 Chapter7 Troubleshooting Viewing Option Module If you encounter unexpected communication problems the option module s Dia gno stic Items diagnostic items may help you or Rockwell Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem Option module diagnostic items can be viewed with the PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM DriveExplorer software version 6 01 or later or DriveExecutive software version 5 01 or later For details on viewing diagnostic items with the HIM see the PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual publication 20HIM UM001 IMPORTANT Some diagnostic items are not applicable when operating the option module in Adapter mode while others are not applicable in Tap mode Therefore th
45. Datalinks to write data and or Parameters 17 18 19 20 and 21 to configure five Datalinks to read data Otherwise the network 1 0 connection will be larger than necessary which needlessly increases controller response time and memory usage Output Data LogicCommand Compatible Module Reference Network Referenc 480V 22 ND 14 HD itas Network Reference Duty EEE amp if si i H H i 2 8 plected for the Input and Output Data appear as Parameter dive Module Defined Data Types and defines parameters in the RSLogo 5000 project Actual en controller and dive is determined by Datalink O Sort by Parameter Name Configuration to the drive to ensure that the module configurations are b From the Port field pull down menu choose the port of the device to which this Datalink will be assigned for this example Port 0 the PowerFlex 753 drive c From the Parameter field pull down menu for the selected device choose the parameter to which this Datalink will point for this example drive parameter 370 Stop Mode A d Click OK to complete configuration of the Datalink The name of the parameter that this Datalink points to is now shown in the row on the Module Definition dialog box e Repeat steps 6a through 6d for each Datalink being configured 7 Click OK on the Module Definition dialog box to save the drive and option module configuratio
46. Dec 0x0000 Ox3FFF Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive Only host devices can have alarms 1 Most Recent Alarm 2 Second Most Recent Alarm Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision UINT Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Maximum number of alarms that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Alarm Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear Alarm 2 Clear Alarm Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved USINT USINT UINT n 5 Get Number of Recorded Alarms UINT Number of alarms in the queue A 0 indicates the alarm queue is empty Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 171 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of UINT Marm code STRUCT of Alarm source USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRING 16 Alarm text STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved UINT Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of UINT Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 va
47. E BA BA EA BY DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur when improperly using software to configure a drive Parameter names selected for the Input and Output Data appear as Connection rs member names in the drive Module Defined Data Types and defines Data Format f necessary Datalink parameters in the RSLogix 5000 project Actual FEES data transfer between conhioller and drive is determined by Datalink M the revision of your drive is not isted parameters cick Create Database button below i drive is online cick Web Update to download the database from You must download configuration to the drive to ensure that the the web if drive is module To match revision and upload the configuration ol an online drive Match Drive Create Database Web Update TIP To get the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 59 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 6 In the Module Definition dialog box edit the following information Box Revision Setting The major and minor revision of the firmware database in the drive If the drive s major and minor revision is not available the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct database revision use one of the following buttons at the bottom left of the Module Definition dialog box Create Database Creat
48. EN P July 2012 105 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Figure 29 Scattered Read Message Configuration Dialog Boxes Message Type Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Scattered Read Message Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_755_Drive CIP Generic X Service Type Custom Source Element Scattered Read Rec 1 Source Length 40 Bytes Service Code Me Instance 0 Class 93 Destination Scattered_Read_Re v New Tag Attribute 0 Q Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Enable Waiting Q Stat Extended Eror Code Done Done Length 0 Timed Out Cancel The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the DPI Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type m Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4d Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 o
49. HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual publication 20HIM UMO001 When the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are set to a value other than 001 254 or 888 Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel determines the source for the option module node address By default the Node Address switches are set to 999 and Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 3 DHCP This combination selects a DHCP server as the source for the node address To use a BOOTP or DHCP server to set the node address see the subsection below To use option module parameters see Using Option Module Parameters on page 36 Using a BOOTP or DHCP Server TIP If the PowerFlex 750 Series drive is connected to a Stratix 6000 or Stratix 8000 managed Ethernet switch and the drive is set for BOOTP mode the dynamic IP address assignment by port Stratix 6000 or DHCP persistence Stratix 8000 feature will set the IP address for the drive For more details see the Stratix 6000 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual publication 1783 UM001 or the Stratix 8000 and Stratix 8300 Ethernet Managed Switches User Manual publication 1783 UM003 There is a variety of BOOTP or DHCP servers available The instructions below use Rockwell Automations BOOTP DHCP Server version 2 3 or later a free standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP and DHCP utilities with a graphical interface It is available from www ab co
50. IP address for the embedded EtherNet IP adapter in the PowerFlex 755 drive Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual publication 750COM UM001 Chapter 2 Installing the Option Module This chapter provides instructions for installing the option module in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Topic Page Preparing for an Installation 17 Setting the Operating Mode 19 Setting the Node Address 20 Connecting the Option Module to the Drive 22 Connecting the Option Module to the Network 23 Applying Power 26 Commissioning the Option Module 30 Prepa ring for an Installation Before installing the option module do the following Make sure the Ethernet switch is the correct type A managed switch that supports IGMP snooping is usually recommended An unmanaged switch can be used instead if RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later is used and all devices on the network are configured for unicast I O For more details see the following documents EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication 148 EtherNet IP Network Infrastructure Guidelines ODVA publication 35 Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual publication ENET RMO02 Understand IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches The option module is a multicast device In most situations an IGMP snooping managed switch
51. Launch my DriveExplora Launch my DriveExecuti 2 E mail technical support For all faults except the following faults example 1 3 5 8 nessage when fault on the is cleared For any alarm O Only for the following alarms example 1 3 5 8 For alarms exce drive i cleared takes its communication fault action takes its idle fault acbon 0 Save changes By default settings are not protected After configuration settings can be protected by using Device Parameter 27 Web Features to set E mail Cfg Bit 0 value to 0 Disabled To change a protected configuration it must first be unprotected by setting the E mail Cfg Bit 0 value back to 1 Enabled To configure e mail notification perform the following steps 1 Click the desired check boxes corresponding to what you want to occur that will send e mail notification e If you want e mail notification only when specific faults or alarms occur click this radio button and enter the fault or alarm numbers in the box e If you want e mail notification only when all faults or alarms except specific faults or alarms occur click this radio button and enter the fault or alarm numbers in the box 2 Click the communication fault and or idle fault check box if you want e mail notification when these faults occur 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Chapter 8 3
52. List view order This section contains lists of Device parameters and Host parameters available when the option module is operated in Adapter mode Device Parameters Adapter Mode Parameter No and Description 01 Operating Mode Values 0 Adapter Displays the option module s operating mode set with the 1 Tap Operating Mode Jumper J4 Figure 1 on page 19 Type Read Only 02 Port Number Minimum 4 Displays the drive port into which the option module is installed Maximum 6 Typically this is Port 4 5 or 6 Type Read Only 03 DLs From Net Act Minimum 0 Displays the number of controller to drive Datalinks that the Maximum 16 drive is using based on the 1 0 connection opened by the Type Read Only controller 04 DLs To Net Act Minimum 0 Displays the number of drive to controller Datalinks that the Maximum 16 controller is using based on the 1 0 connection opened by the Type Read Only controller 05 Net Addr Sel Default 3 DHCP Selects the source from which the option module s node address Values 1 Parameters is taken when the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 2 BOOTP being used that is switches set to any value other than 3 DHCP 001 254 or 888 Type Read Write Reset Required Yes 06 Net Addr Src Values 0 Switches Displays the source from which the option module s node address 1 Parameters is taken 2 3 DHCP Type Read Only
53. Module Allen Bradey My EthesNet IP DLR Bndge C bon P My Powefflex 753 Dive connection Parameters Assembly Instance Sie Comm Format Data DINT Addiess Host Name O IP Address 10 97 O Host Name Open Module Properties Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 81 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 5 Edit the following information about the drive and option module Box Setting Name Aname to identify the drive and option module Description Optional description of the drive option module Comm Format Data DINT This setting formats the data in 32 bit words IP Address The IP address ofthe option module Open Module When this box is checked clicking OK opens additional module properties dialog boxes Properties to further configure the drive option module When unchecked dicking OK closes the drive s New Module dialog box For this example check this box 6 Under Connection Parameters edit the following information Box Assembly Size Instance Input 1 This value is The value will vary based on the number of Host DL From Net xx required parameters used for your application see details below Output 2 This value is The value will vary based on the number of Host DL To Net xx required parameters used for your application see details below Configuration 6 This value is 0 This value is required required Enter the number of 32 bit words t
54. Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 111 Chapter6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only When performing a Scattered Write to REAL data type parameters the REAL parameter value will need to be COP to the DINT parameter value tag in the Request Source Data array Figure 37 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data DINTO Parameter Number DINTO Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value 1 Pad 2 Parameter Number 2 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Value 3 Pad 4 Parameter Number 4
55. Number UDINT Parameter to read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value write zero when reading The response data appears in the following format Name Data Type Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value read zero when writing 0 1 2 If an error occurred bit 15 will be turned on in the response If an error occurred the error code will appear instead of the value Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 TCP IP Interface Object Attribute ID 1 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF5 245 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 No Yes Set Attribute Single Instances The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 UINT The revision of this object Instance Attributes Access Rule Name Data Type Description Get Status of TCP IP Network UDINT Bit Value Interface 0 3 Configuration status 0 Not configured 1 Configured using BOOTP DHCP or parameters 2 Configured using Node Address switches 3 15 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Configuration pending 6 Duplicate IP address 7 15 Reserved Rockwel
56. Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel which can be any of the following 1 Parameters uses address from Device Parameters 07 10 IP Addr Cfg x 2 BOOTP 3 DHCP the default 20 Net Rate Act 1 The data rate used by the option module s ENET1 network port 22 Net Rate Act 2 The data rate used by the option module s ENET2 network port 38 Fr Peer Status The status of the consumed peer 1 0 input connection Values 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted 29 DLs Fr Peer Act The number of peer to drive Datalinks that the drive is expecting 40 DLs To Peer Act The number of drive to peer Datalinks that the drive is expecting When Operating in Tap Mode Option Module Device Parameter 06 Net Addr Src Description Displays the source from which the option module IP address is taken The source is determined by the option module Node Address switch settings shown in Figure 2 and the value of Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel which can be any of the following 1 Parameters uses address from Device Parameters 07 10 IP Addr Cfg x 2 BOOTP 3 DHCP the default 20 Net Rate Act 1 The data rate used by the option module s ENET1 network port 22 Net Rate Act 2 The data rate used by the option module s ENET2 network port 24 Net Rate Act 3 Rockwell Automation Publication 750CO
57. Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 135 Chapter8 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Viewing Web Pages in Tap In Tap mode the option module has a different set of web pages than those Mode shown when operated in Adapter mode 1 Onacomputer with access to the EtherNet IP network on which the drive option module is installed launch a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer software version 5 0 or later The computer can access option module web pages if it is connected to any of the following The same network as the drive option module network with access to the drive option module network via gateway device for example a router 2 In the Address box type the IP address of the option module 3 Press ENTER The option module Tap mode web Home Page Figure 49 appears IMPORTANT From the browser s View menu choose Refresh to always re display the option module Home Page while viewing any of the module s other web pages Figure 49 Tap Mode Web Home Page Example 2 20 750 ENETR 10 91 96 101 Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation 4 In the navigation pane click Diagnostics to display links to the following web pages that contain the listed information Web Pages Tap Mode Information e Module resource utilization e Web server read and write hits Module settings e Ring status e Network management feat
58. Set a unique IP address with the option module rotary switches option module parameters or a BOOTP or DHCP server If NET A indicator is steady red Configure the option module to use a unique IP address and cycle power If NET A indicator is flashing red green or red e Check the IP address in the option module and scanner and verify that the controller can communicate with the option module e Ping the option module Normal condition if the option module is idle Flashing Green The option module is transmitting on the network No action required Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 115 Chapter 7 Indications for Tap Mode Troubleshooting Use the following sections to troubleshoot the Tap mode of operation Operation OK Status Indicator Tap Mode This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the option module as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The option module is not powered or is not properly connected to the e Securely connect and ground the option module to the drive by fully drive inserting it into the drive port and tightening its two captive screws to the recommended torque Apply power to the drive Flashing Red The option module is not communicating with the drive via DPI View the option module event queue to determine which of these conditions is The drive is in firmware upgrade mode present Then depending on the cause take
59. Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Write_Message BOOL MSG Single_Write_Message MESSAGE Figure 26 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Write_Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Write Message 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 103 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Figure 27 Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Dialog Boxes Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single_Write_Message Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_755_Drive Browse Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Set Attribute Single Source Element Accel Time 1 z Type Source Length 4 Bytes Destination zj Service 5 pee 0 Hex Class Instance 535 Attribute New Tag Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 Eror Code Extended Error Code Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text The following table identifies the data that is required in each
60. The definitions of the bits in this word are shown in Appendix D An option module configured for a master slave hierarchy exchanges data with the master device Usually a network has one scanner which is the master device and all other devices for example drives with installed EcherNet IP Option Modules are slave devices network with multiple scanners called a multi master hierarchy each slave device must have one scanner specified as a master Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 NVS Nonvolatile Storage Option Module PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command Peer to Peer Hierarchy Ping PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class Drives Reference Feedback RSLogix 5000 software Scanner SI Serial Interface Glossary NVS is the permanent memory of a device Devices such as the option module and drive store parameters and other information in NVS so that they are not lost when the device loses power NVS is sometimes called EEPROM Devices such as drives controllers and computers usually require a network communication option module to provide a communication interface between them and a network such as EtherNet IP An option module reads data on the network and transmits it to the connected device It also reads data in the device and transmits it to the network The 20 750 ENETR Dual port EtherNet IP option module connects PowerFlex 750 Series dri
61. Upload EDS file from device Security Device Properties After the option module is configured the drive and option module will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple device level ring DLR topology EtherNet IP network see Figure 10 In our example we will configure a 1756 EN2TR Series A bridge to communicate with the first drive in the network ring using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 32 Datalinks 16 to read 16 to write over the network Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 Figure 10 Example ControlLogix Controller EtherNet IP Device level Ring Network To other EtherNet IP networks IP Address 10 91 96 80 ControlLogix Controller with 1756 EN2TR Bridge 1783 8 1783 ETAP IP Address 10 91 96 101 1st Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drives each a with 20 750 ENETR Option Module Computer with Ethernet Connection Adding the Bridge to the 1 0 Configuration To establish communication between the controller and option module over the network you must first add the ControlLogix controller and its bridge to the I O configuration 1 Start RSLogix 5000 software 2 From the File menu choose New to display the New Controller dialog box New Controller Allen Biadey 1756173 ConirolLogu 5573 Contro
62. Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation We Favorites Rockwell Automason Allen Bradley 1 214 Expand Minimize O process display TCP IP configuration Configure e mail notificz Browse DPI devices Gil rot 0 Powerflex 7 Module informatio Diagnostics Fx Diagnosti Rockwell Automation a Information Description Product Text Text identifying the device Vendor ID 1 Allen Bradley Device Type 0x0643 PowerFlex 753 drive Product Code Code for the product name and its rating Revision Firmware revision used by the device Serial Number Serial number of the device Status Operating status of the device for example Alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 133 Chapter8 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Figure 45 Example of Adapter Mode Port 0 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Diagnostic Items Page Rockwell Automation Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation Automation Allen Bradley Expand Minimize Port 0 Diag ems 5 Home n Process display 5 TCP IP configuration Configure e mail notifie Browse DPI devices Port 0 PowerFlex 7 Module informatio Diagnostics Updat Fault queue 7 amp Alarm queue gt ef Command Theta Adjust 1 We Favorites BRockwel Automation Allen Bradley M9 Automation Ex
63. also downloaded to the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 57 Chapter 4 58 Configuring the 1 0 Unicast connection RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later e Drive Add on Profiles version 2 01 or later enable I O to be added online while the controller is in Run mode Drive Add on Profiles can be updated anytime When a new drive is used or to benefit from new updates for Add on Profiles you will need the newest Add on Profile update Go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate to download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile Adding the Drive Option Module to the 1 0 Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge In this example RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 is used with drive Add on Profile version 4 03 To determine your drive Add on Profile version see Allen Bradley Knowledgebase document 65882 1 In the treeview right click the bridge and choose New Module to display the Select Module dialog box In our example we right click the 1756 EN2TR A bridge Expand the Drives group to display all of the available drives with their communication Option Modules TIP If the PowerFlex drive is not shown go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate and download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile Add on Profile version 4 03 or later includes profiles for Powe
64. coc ccc c 0 4294967295 Read Write No 149 AppendixB Option Module Parameters Parameters for Tap Mode Operation 150 This section contains a list of Device parameters available when the option module is operated in Tap mode Device Parameters Tap Mode Parameter No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Name and Description Operating Mode Displays the option module s operating mode set with the Operating Mode Jumper J4 Figure 1 on page 19 Port Number Displays the drive port into which the option module is installed Typically this is Port 4 5 or 6 Reserved Reserved Net Addr Sel Selects the source from which the option module s node address is taken when the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are not being used that is switches set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 Net Addr Src Displays the source from which the option module s node address is taken IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Sets the IP address bytes for the option module s network address when Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters and the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are not being used that is switches set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 255 255 255 255 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012
65. data produced by the controller and consumed by the option module The Feedback is a 32 bit REAL floating point piece of status data produced by the option module and consumed by the controller When using a ControlLogix controller the 32 bit REAL Reference is always DINT 1 in the output image see Table 3 and the 32 bit REAL Feedback is always e DINT 1 in the input image when using the drive Add on Profile e DINT 2 when using the Generic Profile When using a drive Add on Profile the Reference and Feedback are automatically formatted properly and displayed as a controller tag When using the Generic Profile the I O image is integer based and the Reference and Feedback are floating point Because of this a COP Copy instruction or User Defined Data UDDT is required to correctly write values to the Reference and read values from the Feedback See the ladder logic program examples in Figure 20 and Figure 21 TIP When using the drive Add on Profile the controller tags for Reference and Feedback are automatically and properly formatted This eliminates the need for data conversion using COP copy instructions or a UDDT to copy the DINT data into a REAL word The Reference and Feedback 32 bit REAL value represents drive speed The scaling for the speed Reference and Feedback are dependent on drive Parameter 300 Speed Units For example if Parameter 300 is set to Hz a 32 bit REAL Reference value of 30 0 wo
66. drive The tools include the enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM catalog number 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S on the drive and drive configuration software such as DriveExplorer software version 6 01 or later or DriveExecutive software version 5 01 or later Status indicators that report the status of the option module and network communication They are visible when the drive cover is removed e Parameter configured 32 bit Datalinks in the I O to meet application requirements 16 Datalinks to write data from the network to the drive and 16 Datalinks to read data to the network from the drive e Explicit Messaging support 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Option Module Operating Modes Getting Started Chapter 1 Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy that can be configured to transmit data to and from acontroller or another PowerFlex 750 Series drive on the network by using another 20 750 ENETR option module or the embedded EtherNet IP adapter in a PowerFlex 755 drive e Supports Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network operation mode only for only the PowerFlex 755 drive firmware revision 2 003 or later For details to set up Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network operation see Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP Network User Manual publication MOTION UMO003 TIP For best reliability in Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network applications we rec
67. duplex communication mode definition 190 selecting 38 EDS Electronic Data Sheet files definition website 190 EEPROM see Nonvolatile Storage NVS equipment required 13 Ethernet cable 23 24 connectors on option module 9 Ethernet Link object 185 EtherNet IP data rates 137 example network for ControlLogix controller 54 network definition 190 objects 153 186 specification 190 events dearing viewing 122 list of 123 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 195 Index 196 explicit messaging about 99 configuring for ControlLogix controller 101 definition 191 performing 100 F fault action configuring the option module for 46 definition 191 fault configuration configuring the option module for 47 definition 191 faults see events features 10 firmware revision 7 Fit Cfg DL 01 16 Host parameters 149 Fit Cfg Logic Host parameter 148 Fit Cfg Ref Host parameter 149 Fr Peer Addr 1 4 Device parameters 144 Fr Peer Enable Device parameter 144 Fr Peer Status Device parameter 144 Fr Peer Timeout Device parameter 144 full duplex see duplex G gateway 191 gateway address setting with BOOTP or DHCP server 32 setting with parameters 36 Gateway Cfg 1 4 Device parameters Adapter mode 141 Tap mode 151 half duplex see duplex hardware address definition 191 in diagnostic item 119 121 on label 32 HIM Human Interface Module accessing parameters with 32 definition 191 hold last conf
68. e Whether Firmware Supervisor is enabled and needs to upgrade the drive and or any peripherals e 1 20 750 51 Safe Speed Monitor option module which requires manual step in its configuration process is used Ifa DeviceLogix program Port 14 is used With the Firmware Supervisor enabled startup can take quite a long time With all firmware and parameters being updated it takes approximately 45 55 minutes IMPORTANT ADC automatically reset the drive as part of the configuration process This is done because some parameters require a reset before they take effect If a drive is being replaced with an out of the box drive you will typically see at least two resets during the ADC process one for the parameters in the drive Port 0 and for a PowerFlex 755 drive one for the parameters in the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Port 13 See the PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drive Programming Manual publication 750 PM001 for information about the drive status indicators An operational drive in a running Logix system will have the following status indicator states Status Color State Description Indicator STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Drive Steady Drive running no faults are present NETA Green Steady Option module is operating and has at least one CIP connection 1 0 or explicit NETB Green Flashing Option module is transmitting on the ne
69. eserve X eserve X eserve x eserve x eserve X eserve X eserve x eserve X eserve X eserve 1 ANot Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive 2 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Jog 1 Jog 2 condition will jog the drive A transition to a 0 will stop the drive 3 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 17 4 ANot Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Run condition will run the drive A transition to a 0 will stop the drive Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 187 AppendixD Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Logic Status Word Logic Bits 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command x Run Ready Description 0 Not Ready to Run Ready to Run X Active 0 Not Active Active X Command Direction 0 Reverse Forward x Actual Direction 0 Reverse Forward X Accelerating 0 Not Accelerating Accelerating X Decelerating 0 Not Decelerating Decelerating X Alarm 0 No Alarm 959 amp 960 Alarm X Fault 0 No Fault Par 952 amp 953 Fault x At Setpt Spd 0 Not at Setpoint Speed At Setpoint Speed X Manual 0
70. is required If more than one or two EtherNet IP option modules are connected to the switch a managed switch is required otherwise the drive may fault on a Net IO Timeout network loss The option module RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later and a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller will support unicast Unicast setup is required when adding the drive to the I O When all option modules are set up as unicast devices then an IGMP snooping managed switch is not needed Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 17 Chapter 2 18 Installing the Option Module Much of EtherNet IP implicit I O messaging uses IP multicast to distribute I O control data which is consistent with the CIP producer consumer model Historically most switches have treated multicast packets the same as broadcast packets That is all multicast packets are re transmitted to all ports IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports associated with a particular IP multicast group Switches that support IGMP snooping managed switches learn which ports have devices that are part of a particular multicast group and only forward the multicast packets to the ports that are part of the multicast group Be careful as to what level of support a switch has of IGMP snooping Some layer 2 switches that support IGMP snooping r
71. last data received via the network connection before the disruption If the drive was running and using the Reference from the option module it will continue to run at the same Reference An idle action determines how the option module and connected drive act when the controller is switched out of run mode I O data sometimes called implicit messages or input output is time critical data such as a Logic Command and Reference The terms input To Net and output From Net are defined from the controller s point of view Output is produced by the controller and consumed by the option module Input is produced by the option module and consumed by the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 191 Glossary 192 IP Addresses Logic Command Logic Status Master Slave Hierarchy A unique IP address identifies each node on an EtherNet IP network An IP address consists of 32 bits that are divided into four segments of one byte each It appears as four decimal integers separated by periods xxx xxx xxx xxx Each xxx can have a decimal value from 0 to 255 For example an IP address could be 192 168 0 1 An IP address has two parts a network ID anda host ID The class of network determines the format of the address 01 7 15 23 31 ClassA 0 Network ID Host ID 0 1 7 15 23 31 ClassB 1 0 Network ID Host ID 012 7 15 23 31 Class C 111 0 Network I
72. mode For information about the operating modes see Option Module Operating Modes on page 11 Before installing the option module set its Operating Mode Jumper J4 Figure 1 for the desired mode of operation TIP If Operating Mode Jumper J4 is missing the option module operates in the Adapter mode IMPORTANT jumper setting is recognized only when power is applied to the option module or the module is reset If you change a jumper setting cycle power to the drive or reset the module to apply the change Figure 1 Setting Operating Mode Jumper J4 oO QA RAGA o 7 c as Adapter Mode Tap Mode Jumper Position Jumper Position default a Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 19 Chapter2 Installing the Option Module Setting the Node Address 20 There are four methods for configuring the option module node address e Node Address Switches Use these switches when working on a simple isolated network for example 192 168 1 xxx that has other products with switches to set their IP addresses does not need to be accessed from outside the network and you prefer a simplified node addressing method The three rotary switches are read when the drive powers up and represent three decimal digits from top to bottom see Figure 2 When set to a v
73. module set two fields in drive Parameter 545 Speed Ref A Sel a Set the Port field for the drive for example 0 PowerFlex 755 b Set the Parameter field to point to the drive port in which the option module is installed for this example Port 4 Reference Also verify that the mask parameters in the drive for example Parameter 324 Logic Mask are configured to receive the desired logic from the option module See the drive documentation for details After the above steps are complete the option module is ready to receive input data and transfer status data to the master controller Next configure the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the option module See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Enabling Datalinks To Read Data The controller input image drive to controller inputs can have 0 to 16 additional 32 bit parameters Datalinks They are configured using Host Parameters 17 DL To Net 01 through 32 DL To Net 16 The number of Datalinks actively used is controlled by the connection size in the controller See the respective controller example sections in Chapter 4 for more information on setting the connection size IMPORTANT Always use the Datalink parameters in consecutive numerical order starting with the first parameter For example use Host Parameters 17 18 19 20 and 21 to configure five Datalinks to read data Otherwise the network 1 0 connection will be larger than necessary which nee
74. module to scanner read only 36 DL From Net 16 output data from scanner to option module read write 37 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 38 Masked Logic Command T read write 39 Logic Status data read only 40 Logic Command data read write 4 Feedback data read only 42 Reference data read write 1 The mask command DWORD is set to the value of the first DWORD of the data where there are ones in the second DWORD of the data Only the bits of the Logic Command that have the corresponding mask bit set are applied Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Description 1 Read Revision 2 Read Maximum Instance 3 Read Number of Instances 100 Read Write Timeout Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Bad Flag BOOL If set to 1 then attribute 4 may contain invalid data 0 good 1 bad 2 Direction 001 Direction of data transfer 0 Producer Register drive to network 1 Consumer Register network to drive 3 Size UINT Size of register data in bits 4 Conditional Data ARRAY of BITS Data to be transferred 1 Forthis attribute the Access Rule is Get if Direction 0 The Access Rule is Set if Direction 1 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix PCCC Object Class Code Hexade
75. not applicable in Tap mode Therefore these non applicable parameters are labeled Reserved in the Adapter Mode Operation and Tap Mode Operation parameter tables in this appendix Host parameters are used to configure the option module Datalink transfer and various fault actions with the drive Host parameters when viewed using DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive appear below the 20 750 ENETR listing in the treeview in a separate Host Parameters folder When viewed with the 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM these parameters appear in the HOST PARAM folder IMPORTANT When operating the option module in Tap mode Host parameters are NOT supported Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 139 AppendixB Option Module Parameters About Parameter Numbers How Parameters Are Organized Parameters for Adapter Mode Operation 140 Each parameter set is independently and consecutively numbered Configuration Tool HIM DriveExplorer e DriveExecutive Numbering Scheme The Device parameters and Host parameters begin with parameter 01 For example Device Parameter 01 Port Number and Host Parameter 01 Net to Drv DL 01 are parameter 01 as indicated by this manual e Explicit Messaging See Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only and Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only for details The Device Parameters and Host Parameters are separately displayed in a Numbered
76. option module has received EtherNet IP Missed 1 0 Packets Number of 1 0 connection packets that the option module did not receive Ethernet Receive Errors Number of receive errors reported by the hardware Ethernet Transmitted Packets Number of packets that the option module has sent Ethernet Transmit Errors Number of transmit errors reported by the hardware Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 129 Chapter8 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Ada pter Mode Configure E The Adapter mode Configure E mail Notification web page contains selections mail Notification Web Pa ge and data fields for configuring the option module to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected types of events occur To view this web page click the Configure e mail link highlighted in Figure 41 in the navigation pane Figure 41 Example of Adapter Mode Configure E mail Notification Web Page Rockwell Automation Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation Automation Allen Bradley EATEN VAI S Ve Rockwell Expand Minimize Configure E mail Notification D Process display 0 Send an e mail message when a fault trip is declared on the DPI host drive TCP IP configuration For any fault Configure e mail notific Dei devices Only for the following faults example 1 3 5 8 Online user manuals 5 Software tools Web sits
77. option module operates as an EtherNet IP network communication module With its EcherNet IP embedded switch technology and ENET 1 and ENET2 network ports the option module enables the drive to be Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 11 Chapter1 Getting Started Understanding Parameter Types 12 used in a linear or device level ring DLR network topology When using a star network topology either the ENET1 or ENET2 network port may be used In Adapter mode the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network functionality is not supported Tap Mode only with PowerFlex 755 drives In the Tap mode the option module operates like a gateway and functions similar to the 1783 ETAP module By connecting the supplied Ethernet cable between the option modules ENET3 network port and the embedded EtherNet IP adapter port on the PowerFlex 755 drive the option module enables the PowerFlex 755 drive to extend its I O connection to a linear or device level ring DLR network topology This also enables Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network functionality supported by the PowerFlex 755 drive to be used with these topologies The option module has two types of parameters e Device parameters are used to configure the option module to operate on the network Device parameters when viewed with DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software appear below the 20 750 ENETR listing in the treeview in a separate Device P
78. or user configured title Rockwell Automation logo This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the Rockwell Automation web Home Page Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Chapter 8 Navigation Pane on Adapter Mode Web Pages The navigation pane appears on the left side of the option module Adapter mode Home Page and all of the module s other Adapter mode web pages The navigation pane consists of links and link folders which can be expanded or minimized The following table shows all navigation pane links and link folders Navigation Pane Link Folder Home link Description Click this link to view the module s Adapter mode Home Page Figure 38 Process display link Click this link to view the host drive s Process Display pop up dialog box Figure 39 TCP IP configuration link Click this link to view the modules TCP IP Configuration web page showing information about the TCP IP configuration such as the module IP address and the number of packets being sent Figure 40 shows an example TCP IP Configuration web page Configure e mail notification link Click this link to view the module s Configure E mail Notification web page Figure 41 to configure the option module to send automatic e mail messages An example e mail message is shown in Figure 43 Browse DPI devices folder Click this folder to expand and view the Port folders for all prese
79. software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures gt e eD IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation TechConnect PowerFlex DriveExplorer DriveTools DriveExecutive RSLinx RSLogix ControlLogix PLC 5 SLC and MicroLogix are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Preface Ge
80. the following drive parameters e 329 Alternate Manual Reference Analog High 547 Speed Reference A Analog High 552 Speed Reference B Analog High e 564 Digital Input Manual Reference Analog High e 571 577 Preset Speed 1 7 602 Trim Reference A Analog High 606 Trim Reference B Analog High Setting drive Parameter 520 or 521 to a lower value could cause the settings in the above parameters to become out of range If you adjust Parameter 520 or 521 check the above parameters and make any necessary updates to verify they are in range NOTE It is recommended to review all parameters needed for your application to verify that they are in range When using version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs a yellow highlight and text notification in the Parameters Linear List editor appears to identify out of range parameters ADCand Logix Memory Starting in RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 drive configuration settings have been stored in the project s ACD file which is downloaded and stored in the controller Configuration settings for ADC capable devices contain additional port and scripting information to choreograph the download process so additional Logix memory is used compared with PowerFlex 750 Series drives in RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 19 00 systems Note these examples of memory usage A PowerFlex 755 drive with no option modules minimal parameters changed
81. to the configuration of the Safe Speed Monitor Module the password for the Module is stored in the configuration script in the controller and used as part ofthe connection process to allow the configuration stored in the controller to be downloaded to the Module This password will need to be entered into the profile for the Safe Speed Monitor Module in the drives Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software This password value is the value entered in parameter 13 of the Safe Speed Monitor Module on controller download to the Module which is required by procedure to be recorded by the user for future use when interacting with the Module When using this password in the future it would be entered into parameter 1 for the Safe Speed Monitor Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 77 Chapter 4 78 Configuring the 1 0 Module to allow either locking via parameter 5 or password changing via parameters 13 and 17 IMPORTANT Donotset Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 5 Lock State to 1 Lock or parameter 6 Operating Mode to 1 Run in the Add on Profile configuration before saving the configuration to the controller Setting these parameters would lock the Module and prevent writing the higher numbered parameters thus causing the ADC download to fail These two parameters need to be changed manually after performing an upload or after the ADC download The following manual steps may be need
82. two ways to restore the option module Device and Host parameters ALL restores ALL option module Device and Host parameters to their factory default values MOST restores MOST option module Device and Host parameters except the following which are used for network setup Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel Device Parameters 07 through 10 IP Addr Cfg 1 4 Device Parameters 11 through 14 Subnet Cfg 1 4 Device Parameters 15 through 18 Gateway Cfg 1 4 Device Parameter 19 Net Rate Cfg 1 Device Parameter 21 Net Rate Cfg 2 Device Parameter 23 Net Rate Cfg 3 Tap mode only IMPORTANT When operating the option module in Tap mode Host parameters are NOT supported so only Device parameters are reset to their factory default values Follow these steps to restore option module Device and Host parameters to their factory default values 1 Access the Status screen which is displayed on HIM powerup Use the or BI key to scroll to the Port in which the option module is installed Press the key to display its last viewed folder Use the or key to scroll to the MEMORY folder or key to select Set Defaults Press the Enter key to display the Set Defaults pop up box Press the Enter key again to display the warning pop up box to reset Device and Host parameters to their factory default values Press the MOST soft k
83. value write zero when reading The response data appears in the following format Name Data Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value read zero when writing 2 1 2 If an error occurred bit 15 will be turned on in the response If an error occurred the error code will appear instead of the value Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 DPI Fault Object EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x97 151 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for faults Option Modules use this object for events Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of faults or events supported in the queue The maximum number of faults events can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Device Example Description Hex Dec 0x0000 0x3FFF 10 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Option Module 1 Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 Port 2 2 Second Most Recent Drive Fault Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 Port3 16384 Class Attributes Option Module 0x5000 0x53FF 20480
84. 0 for limitations of PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 5 In this example we are writing to five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each parameter being written to requires two contiguous DINT registers Therefore a controller tag was created 6 with its Data Type field set to the name of the UDDT of five interleaved DINTs and REALs Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration dialog box must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 40 bytes for an array of five scattered REAL structures Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum message length is 256 bytes which can write up to 32 parameters regardless of their size For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code Ox9F The controller tag for Scattered_Write_Response must be the same size as the controller tag for Scattered Write Request for this example 40 bytes An array of DINTs is suggested to be able to read any error codes that are returned Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 109 Chapter 6 110 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this
85. 00 projects with version 4 01 Drive AOPs ADC will be enabled by default for any drive that supports ADC such as PowerFlex 753 drives with firmware 7 001 or later or PowerFlex 755 drives with firmware 4 001 or later RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 can be updated with version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs which are available via free download at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html TIP To identify the Drive AOP version click the icon in the upper left corner of the Module Properties dialog box and select About Module Profile Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 Version 4 02 or later Drive Add on Profiles AOPs Version 4 02 Drive AOPs require user action to enable ADC This helps verify that the user understands ADC operation prior to turning it on Note the following ADC operating status when using version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs e When adding a new drive ADC is disabled by default for any drive that supports ADC such as PowerFlex 753 drives with firmware 7 001 or later or PowerFlex 755 drives with firmware 4 001 or later e When converting an earlier RSLogix 5000 project to a version 20 00 project that has been updated with version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs or when updating a project created with version 4 01 Drive AOPs any ADC settings will be passed through as is for drives that support ADC For example IfADC was disa
86. 012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
87. 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 Port7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision UINT Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of timers in the object excluding the real time clock that is predefined 3 Get First Device Specific Timer UINT Instance of the first timer that is not predefined 4 Set Time Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear all timers Does not clear real time clock or read only timers 5 Get Number of Supported Time Zones UINT Number of time zones described in the Time Zone List attribute 6 Get Time Zone List STRUCT Identifies a time zone 7 Get Set Active Time Zone ID UINT The ID field of the Time Zone List structure for the desired time zone Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 175 Appendix EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 8 Get Active Time Zone Data Struct of INT Standard bias USINT Standard month USINT Standard day of week
88. 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 Ox5C00 0xSFFF 23552 24575 Port7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name DataType Description 0 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password UINT 0 Password disabled Password value 2 Set NVS Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 4 Partial defaults 5 System defaults 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum UINT Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum UINT Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter UINT First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision UINT 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error UINT The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks Rockwell Automation Publication 750
89. 0x6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision UINT 1 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of diagnostic items in the device 3 Get ENUM Offset UINT DPI ENUM object instance offset Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 173 AppendixC _EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Instance Attributes AttributeID Rule Data Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of B00L 32 Descriptor see page 166 CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value UINT Pad Word UINT Pad Word STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz UINT Multiplier 2 UINT Divisor 2 UINT Base INT Offset 2 UDINT Link source of the value 0 no link STRING 16 Diagnostic name text 1 Get Set Value Various Diagnostic item value 2 Get International Diagnostic Struct of Item Text STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 3 Get International Full Read All STRUCT of B00L 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum CONTAINER Maximum CONTAINER Default UINT Pad word UINT Pad word UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset UDINT Pad B00L 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN Di
90. 14 My PoweiFlex_753 Drive O Data 16 DINT DL From Net 15 My PowerFlex 753 Drive D Data 17 DINT DL From Net 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 95 Chapter5 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Program Tags To use the Controller tags that are automatically created you need to create the following Program tags for this example program Data Type 96 Command Clear Faults Command Forward Reverse Command Jog Command Start Command Stop Speed Feedback Speed Reference Status Active Status Speed Status Faulted ojojo oio e Status Forward Status Ready Status Reverse Figure 20 ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Status Feedback My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 1 0 My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 1 1 My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 1 3 Status_Ready Status_Active Status_Forward My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 1 3 amp Status_Reverse My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 1 7 My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 1 8 COP Copy File Dest Length Source My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 2 Speed Feedback Status At Speed Co Status Faulted 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Chapter 5 Figure 21 ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Lo
91. 36 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 21 DL To Net 05 537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 22 DL To Net 06 538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 23 DL To Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 24 DL To Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 25 DL To Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 26 DL To Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 27 DL To Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 28 DL To Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 29 DL To Net 13 574 Points to drive 574 Preset Speed 4 30 DL To Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 31 DL To Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 32 DL To Net 16 57 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 TIP The Host DL From Net xx parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter The Host DL To Net xx parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter 94 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Chapter 5 Controller Tags When you add the option module and drive to the I O configuration Chapter 4 RSLogix 5000 software automatically creates generic non descriptive controller tags In this example program the follow
92. 4 Instances Device Example Description Hex Dec 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Option Module 1 Drive Component 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 2 Drive Component 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 Port 2 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 Port3 16384 Class Attributes Option Module 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port4 16385 Option Module Component 1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 0x5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Family Code USINT 0x00 DPI Peripheral 0x90 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive OxA0 20 750 xxxx Option Module OxFF HIM 1 Get Family Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device 2 Set Language Code USINT 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5
93. 49 restoring parameters to factory default values 50 specifications 137 viewing its status using parameters 51 web pages 125 136 P parameters accessing 31 convention 7 Device parameters list Adapter mode 140 145 Tap mode 150 152 Host parameters list Adapter mode 146 149 Tap mode 152 numbering scheme 140 restoring to factory default values 50 PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command 193 PCCC object 157 Peer Fit Action Host parameter 148 Peer to Peer hierarchy custom peer 1 0 setting up master broadcaster 42 setting up slave receiver 43 definition 193 simple peer 1 0 setting up master broadcaster 41 setting up slave receiver 42 ping 193 Port Number Device parameter Adapter mode 140 Tap mode 150 PORT status indicator Adapter mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 114 PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 197 Index 198 PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class drives compatible with option module 13 definition 193 HIM 32 preparing for an installation 17 processor see controller programmable logic controller see controller Q quick start 15 Ref Src Cfg Device parameter 143 Reference Feedback definition 193 1 0 image for ControlLogix controller 88 using 89 Register object 156 regulatory compliance 138 related documentation 8 requested packet interval 62 83 Reset Module Device parameter Adapter mode 142 Ta
94. Access 48 By using a web browser to access the IP address set for the option module you can view the option module web pages for information about the module the drive and other DPI devices connected to the drive such as HIMs or converters IMPORTANT Depending on its selected operating mode Adapter or Tap the option module provides a unique set of web pages with different information By default the option module web pages are disabled To enable the option module web pages set Device Parameter 26 Web Enable to 1 Enabled Value Description 0 Disabled Default 1 Enabled For more details on the option module web pages see Chapter 8 Viewing Option Module Web Pages In Adapter mode the option module can be configured to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the option module takes a communication or idle fault action Bit 0 of Device Parameter 27 Web Features is used to protect the configured settings for e mail messaging By default settings are not protected and the user can make changes To protect the configured settings set the value of E mail Cfg Bit 0 to 0 Disabled You can unprotect the configuration by changing Bit 0 back to 1 Enabled E mail messaging will always remain active regardless of whether or not its settings are protected unless e mail messaging was zever configured For more informa
95. COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 163 AppendixC _EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Instance Attributes Attribute ID Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline Minimum value CONTAINER Offline Maximum value CONTAINER Offline Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad byte always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value UINT Multiplier UNIT Divisor UNIT Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of B00L 32 Descriptor see page 166 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value UINT Next parameter UINT Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz UINT Multiplier 2 UINT Divisor 0 UINT Base INT Offset 2 USINT 3 Link source of the value 0 no link USINT Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor B00L 32 Descriptor see page 166 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS 3 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value
96. Common Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this option module Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this option module 3 Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this option module 4 Common Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this option module 5 Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this option module 6 42 Reserved 43 DPI Rx Errs The present value of the DPI Receive error counter 44 DPI Rx Errs Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Receive error counter 45 DPI Tx Errs The present value of the DPI Transmit error counter 46 DPI Tx Errs Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Transmit error counter 47 48 Reserved 49 HW Addr 1 Decimal value of each byte in the option module s Ethernet hardware address 50 HW Addr 2 255 255 255 255 255 255 51 HWAddr3 52 HWAddr 4 53 HWAddr5 54 HW Addr HW HW Addr 4 HW Addr 5 HW Addr 6 55 IP Addr Act 1 Value of each byte in the option module s present IP address A value of 0 appears if the option module 56 IP Addr Act 2 does not currently have an IP address 57 IP Addr Act 3 D 255 255 255 58 IP Addr Act 4 IP Addr Act 1 IP Addr Act 2 IP Addr Act 3 IP Addr Act 4 59 Subnet Act 1 Value of each byte in the option mo
97. Configuringthel O Chapter 4 6 To match the Datalinks in the drive to the project I O configuration click Use Project After the Datalinks have been matched the Input Data and Output Data columns are grayed out 7 Click Continue A series of download dialog boxes appear which may take a minute to complete Thereafter the I O OK box in the upper left of the RSLogix 5000 dialog box should now be steady green and the yellow warning symbols in the treeview under the I O Configuration folder and drive profile should be gone After a few moments the Module Properties dialog box should indicate that it is connected to the online drive Wil Module Properties My_EtherNet_IP_DLR_Bridge 0 PowerFlex 753 ENETR 6 2 fe General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive j Orve CEA fl My PowetFlex 753 Div Mj 0 Powerex m PowerFlex 753 GG Diagrams 1 Parameter List PowerFlex 753 19 Diagnostic Item List fig 1 20HIM46 480V 22A a mois 4 EtherNetAP Standard 5 Aux PwiSply 24V t 14 DeviceLogx Port 0 Revision 6 002 Startup Actv 0 000 Hz Status Waring 8 Click OK to close the Module Properties dialog box for the drive Using Automatic Device Configuration ADC with RSLogix 5000 Software Version 20 00 or Later Automatic Device Configuration ADC is an RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 or later feature that supports the automatic download of configuration data This occur
98. D Host ID The number of devices on your EtherNet IP network will vary depending on the number of bytes that are used for the network address In many cases you are given a network with a Class C address in which the first three bytes contain the network address subnet mask 255 255 255 0 This leaves 8 bits or 256 addresses on your network Because two addresses are reserved for special uses 0 is an address for the network usually used by the router and 255 is an address for broadcast messages to all network devices you have 254 addresses to use on a Class C address block To be sure that each device on the Internet has a unique address contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider for unique fixed IP addresses You can then set the unique IP address for the option module by using its rotary address switches a DHCP or BOOTP server or by manually configuring parameters in the option module The option module reads the values of these parameters only at power up The Logic Command is used to control the PowerFlex 750 Series drive for example start stop direction It consists of one 32 bit word of output to the option module from the network The definitions of the bits in this word are shown in Appendix D The Logic Status is used to monitor the PowerFlex 750 Series drive for example operating state motor direction It consists of one 32 bit word of input from the option module to the network
99. DL From Net 10 most significant DL To Net 10 most significant N45 24 DL From Net 11 least significant DL To Net 11 least significant N45 25 DL From Net 11 most significant DL To Net 11 most significant N45 26 DL From Net 12 least significant DL To Net 12 least significant N45 27 DL From Net 12 most significant DL To Net 12 most significant N45 28 DL From Net 13 least significant DL To Net 13 least significant N45 29 DL From Net 13 most significant DL To Net 13 most significant N45 30 DL From Net 14 least significant DL To Net 14 least significant N45 31 DL From Net 14 most significant DL To Net 14 most significant N45 32 DL From Net 15 least significant DL To Net 15 least significant N45 33 DL From Net 15 most significant DL To Net 15 most significant N45 34 DL From Net 16 least significant DL To Net 16 least significant N45 35 DL From Net 16 most significant DL To Net 16 most significant Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 159 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only DPI Device Object 160 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x92 146 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device The total number of components can be read in Instance 0 Class Attribute
100. Data 3 DINT DL From Net 08 My_PowerFlex_753_Drive D Data 10 DINT DL From Net 03 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive O Data 11 DINT _DL From Net 10 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 12 DINT DL From Net 11 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive 0 Data 13 DINT DL From Net 12 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 14 DINT DL From Net 13 My PowerFlex 753 Drive 0 Data 15 DINT _DL From Net 14 8 My 753 Drive O Data 15 DINT DL From Net 15 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data17 DINT DL From Net 16 Saving the 1 0 Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive option module to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer TIP When using RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later you can add the 1 0 configuration of a Generic Profile while the controller is online and in the Run mode 1 From the Communications menu in the RSLogix 5000 dialog box choose Download 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the O Chapter 4 The Download dialog box appears Download A Download offline project v20_Example_using_20750ENETR_for_PF753 to the controller Connected Controller Name v20 Example using 20750ENETR for PF753 1756 L73 A ControlLogix5573 Controller EtherNet IP 10 91 96 80 Backplane 0 Serial Number 006058 Security No Protection EN DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of mac
101. Decimal DINT DL From Net 02 Stop Mode B 2 Decimal DINT DL From Net 03 Accel Time 1 5 Float REAL DL From Net 04 Accel Time 2 0 Float REAL DL From Net 05 Decel Time 1 7 5 Float REAL DL From Net 06 Decel Time 2 0 Float REAL DL From Net 07 Acc Dec Time 5 Float REAL DL From Net 08 Jog Speed 1 0 0 Float REAL DL From Net 03 Speed 2 0 Float REAL DL From Net 10 Preset Speed 1 0 Float REAL DL From Net 11 Preset Speed 2 0 Float REAL DL From Net 12 Preset Speed 3 E 0 0 Float REAL DL From Net 13 Preset Speed 4 0 Float REAL DL From Net 14 Preset Speed 5 0 Float REAL DL From Net 15 Preset Speed 5 0 Float REAL DL From Net 16 Preset Speed 7 0 Float REAL DL To Net e DL To Net DL To Net 01 Stop Mode Decimal DINT DL To Net 02 Stop Mode B Decimal DINT DL To Net 03 Accel Time 1 5 Float REAL DL To Net 04 Accel Time 2 0 Float REAL DL To Net 05 Decel Time 1 7 5 Float REAL DL To Net 06 Decel Time 2 0 Float REAL DL To Net 07 Jog Acc Dec Time 5 Float REAL DL To Net 08 Jog Speed 1 0 Float REAL DL To Net 08 Speed 2 0 Float REAL DL To Net 10 Preset Speed 1 0 0 Float REAL DL To Net 11 Preset Speed 2 0 Float REAL DL To Net 12 Preset Speed 3 0 0 Float REAL DL To Net 13 Preset Speed 4 0 Float REAL DL To Net 14 Preset Speed 5 0 Float REAL DL To Net 15 Preset Speed 0 Float REAL DL To Net 16 Preset Speed 7 Float REAL
102. Device Parameter 26 Web Enable to 0 Disabled will not stop the option module from sending e mail messages 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Adapter Mode Device Information Pages Viewing Option Module Web Pages Chapter 8 Adapter mode device information pages are viewed by clicking on the respective links in the navigation pane Adapter Mode Web Page Module Information Description Shows module information for the respective drive Port device For example Figure 44 shows module information for the Port 0 device host drive Diagnostic Items Shows diagnostic item information for the respective drive Port device For example Figure 45 shows diagnostic items for the Port 0 device host drive Fault Queue Shows fault queue information for the respective drive Port device For example Figure 46 shows the fault queue for the Port 0 device host drive Alarm Queue Shows alarm queue information for the respective drive Port device For example Figure 47 shows the alarm queue for the Port 0 device host drive Event Queue 7 Shows event queue information for the respective drive Port device For example Figure 48 shows the event queue for the Port 4 device EtherNet IP option module 1 Information shown only when supported by the device Figure 44 Example of Adapter Mode Port 0 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Module Information Page 2 Rockwell Automation
103. E mail Notification Web Page 130 Adapter Mode Device Information Pages 133 Viewing Web Pages in Tap Mode 136 Future enhancements may result in option module web pages that look different than the examples shown in this chapter After the option module is configured and operating you can view its web pages They present information about the module the drive to which it is connected and the other DPI devices connected to the drive such as a HIM IMPORTANT Depending on its selected operating mode Adapter or Tap the option module provides a unique set of web pages with different information By default the option module web pages are disabled To enable the option module web pages set Device Parameter 26 Web Enable to 1 Enabled In Adapter mode the option module can be configured to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the option module takes a communication or idle fault action Bit 0 of Device Parameter 27 Web Features can be used to protect the configured settings For more details see Adapter Mode Configure E mail Notification Web Page on page 130 1 Onacomputer with access to the EtherNet IP network on which the drive option module is installed launch a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer software version 5 0 or later Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 125 Chapter 8
104. Flequest Preset Speed_7_Par_No 577 DINT Scattered Write Request Preset Speed 7 Par Value 55 5 REAL ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data The results of the message appear in the destination tag named Write Response Figure 35 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 35 Example Scattered Write Response Data Name x Value Data Type Description H Scattered Write Response DINT 10 Scattered Write Response 0 536 DINT Scaltered Write Response 1 DINT Scaltered Write Response 2 532 DINT Scattered Write Response 3 o DINT Scaltered Write Response 4 575 DINT Scattered Write Response 5 DINT Scattered_Write_Response 6 576 DINT Scattered Write Response 7 DINT Scattered Write_Responsel8 577 DINT Scattered_Write_Response 3 DINT Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 36 and Figure 37 use 32 bit words and can accommodate up to 32 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with Bit 15 set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative The PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drive
105. Flex 750 Series drive can be separately configured for the control and Reference functions in various combinations For example you could set the drive to have its control come from a peripheral or terminal block with the Reference coming from the network Or you could set the drive to have its control come from the network with the Reference coming from another peripheral or terminal block Or you could set the drive to have both its control and Reference come from the network The following steps in this section assume that the drive will receive the Logic Command and Reference from the network 1 Verify that drive Parameter 301 Access Level is set to 1 Advanced or 2 Expert to access the required parameters in this procedure 2 Use drive Parameter 545 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference a Set the Port field to 0 as shown below Parameter 545 Spd Ref A Sel Properties Value Numeric Edit Documentation Port 0 PowerFlex 755 Parameter 874 Port 4 Reference Value Port 0 Port 4 Reference Intemal Value 10 0000036 C Hex Bin Range Intemal Value 0 159999 871 b Set the Parameter field to point to the port slot in which the option module is installed for this example Port 4 Reference The number 874 in the Parameter field of the example dialog box above is the parameter in the drive that points to the port 3 V
106. Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 4 In this example we are reading five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each parameter being read requires two contiguous DINT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to DINT 10 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration dialog box must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 40 bytes for a DINT 10 array Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum message length is 256 bytes which can read up to 32 parameters regardless of their size For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code Ox9F 5 controller tag for Scattered Read Response must be the same size as the controller tag for Scattered Read Request for this example 40 bytes but can be a different data type for this example a UDDT to handle conversions to parameter values that are a REAL data type 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 30 in the source tag named Scattered Read Request to read these five 32 bit REAL floating point
107. I Parameter Object 0x93 147 163 Ethernet Link Object OxF6 246 185 DPI Fault Object 0x97 151 169 nn TIP See the EtherNet IP specification for more information about EtherNet IP objects Information about the EtherNet IP specification is available on the ODVA website http www odva org Data Type Description BOOL 8 bit value low bit is true or false BOOL x Array of n bits CONTAINER 32 bit parameter value sign extended if necessary DINT 32 bit signed integer INT 16 bit signed integer LWORD 64 bit unsigned integer REAL 32 bit floating point SHORT_STRING Struct of USINT length indicator L USINT L characters SINT 8 bit signed integer STRINGN Struct of UINT character length indicator W UINT length indicator L USINT W x L string data STRING x Array of n characters STRUCT Structure name only no size in addition to elements TCHAR 8 16 bit character UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer USINT 8 bit unsigned integer Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 153 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Identity Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x01 1 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x05 No Yes Reset OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x01 Yes Yes Get Attributes All Instances 154 The number of instances depends on the numbe
108. L Net 05 6 DL To Net 04 7 DL From Net 06 7 DL To Net 06 7 DL Net 05 8 DL From Net 07 8 DL To Net 07 8 DL To Net 06 9 DL From Net 08 9 DL To Net 08 9 DL To Net 07 10 DL From Net 09 10 DL To Net 09 10 DL To Net 08 11 DL From Net 10 11 DL To Net 10 11 DL To Net 09 12 DL From Net 11 12 DL To Net 11 12 DL To Net 10 13 DL From Net 12 13 DL To Net 12 13 DL To Net 11 14 DL From Net 13 14 DL To Net 13 14 DL To Net 12 15 DL From Net 14 15 DL To Net 14 15 DL To Net 13 16 DL From Net 15 16 DL To Net 15 16 DL To Net 14 17 DL From Net 16 17 DL To Net 16 17 DL To Net 15 18 DL To Net 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Chapter 5 Using Logic Command Status The Logic Command is a 32 bit word of control data produced by the controller Using Reference Feedback and consumed by the option module The Logic Status is a 32 bit word of status data produced by the option module and consumed by the controller When using a ControlLogix controller the Logic Command word is always DINT 0 in the output image and the Logic Status word is always e DINT 0 in the input image when using the drive Add on Profile DINT 1 when using the Generic Profile This manual contains the bit definitions for compatible products available at the time of publication in Appendix D Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 750 Series Drives The Reference is a 32 bit REAL floating point piece of control
109. M UMO08A EN P July 2012 The data rate used by the option module s ENET3 DEVICE port 51 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Updating the Option Module Firmware The option module firmware can be updated over the network or serially through direct connection from a computer to the drive using a 1203 USB or 1203 SSS serial converter When updating firmware over the network you can use the Allen Bradley ControlFLASH software tool the built in update capability of DriveExplorer Lite or Full software or the built in update capability of DriveExecutive software When updating firmware through a direct serial connection from a computer to a drive you can use the same Allen Bradley software tools described above or you can use HyperTerminal set to the X modem protocol To obtain a firmware update for this option module go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate This website contains all firmware update files and associated Release Notes that describe firmware update enhancements anomalies how to determine the existing firmware revision and how to update the firmware using DriveExplorer software DriveExecutive software the ControlFLASH tool or HyperTerminal 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using RSLinx Classic Software Chapter 4 Configuring the 1 0 This chapter provides instructions on how to configure a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix controller to communicate
110. Manual Mode Not Active Manual Mode Active X Spd Ref ID 0 x Spd Ref ID 1 X Spd Ref ID 2 Xx Spd Ref ID 3 Xx Spd Ref ID 4 00000 Reserved 00001 Auto Ref A Par 545 00010 Auto Ref B Par 550 00011 Auto Preset Speed 3 Par 573 00100 Auto Preset Speed 4 Par 574 00101 Auto Preset Speed 5 Par 575 00110 Auto Preset Speed 6 Par 576 00111 Auto Preset Speed 7 Par 577 01000 Reserved 01001 Reserved 01010 Reserved 01011 Reserved 01100 Reserved 01101 Reserved 01110 Reserved 01111 Reserved 0000 Man Port 0 0001 Man Port 1 0010 Man Port 2 0011 Man Port 3 0100 Man Port 4 0101 Man Port 5 0110 Man Port 6 0111 Reserved 1000 Reserved 1001 Reserved 1010 Reserved 1011 Reserved 1100 Reserved 1101 Man Port 13 Embedded 1110 Man Port 14 Drive Logix 1111 Alternate Man Ref Sel X served x unning Not Running Running x logging Not Jogging Par 556 amp 557 logging x Stopping 0 Not Stopping Stopping X C Brake 0 Not DC Brake DC Brake x B Active 0 Not Dynamic Brake Active Dynamic Brake Active x Speed Mode 0 Not Speed Mode Par 309 Speed Mode X osition Mode 0 Not Position Mode Par 309 Position Mode X orque Mode 0 Not Torque Mode Par 309 Torque Mode
111. Network RSNefWone YTSE EN2TR 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethemet Bridge 2Pot Twisted Par Moda Vendor Allen Bradey Parent Local Name My Etheset IP Bridge Private Network 1921681 Ethemet Address OIP Address 10 9 9 O Host Name Ch Skt 31 Compatible Modde Nene 9 Edit the following Name Aname to identify the bridge Description Optional description of the bridge 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 Box Setting Click Change to change Revision or Electronic Keying Revision The minor revision of the firmware in the bridge You already set the major revision by selecting the bridge series in step 5 Electronic Keying Compatible Module The Compatible Module setting for Electronic Keying verifies that the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore be sure that you have set the correct revision in this dialog box See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Disable keying is recommended IP Address The IP address of the EtherNet IP bridge Host Name Not used Slot The slot of the EtherNet IP bridge in the rack 10 Click OK The bridge is now configured for the EtherNet IP network added to the RSLogix 5000 project and appea
112. No action if set to 0 Ready Resets the option module if set to 1 Reset Module Restores the option module to its factory default settings if set to 2 Set Defaults This parameter is a command It will be reset to 0 Ready after the command has been performed When performing a Set Defaults the drive may detect a conflict If this occurs the drive will not allow a Set Defaults action You must resolve the conflict before attempting a Set Defaults action for the option module A Values Type Default Values Type Reset Required Values Type Default Values Type Reset Required respond before resetting the option module Web Enable Default Enables disables the option module s web pages Values Type Reset Required Web Features Type Enables disables the web configurable e mail notification Reset Required feature s Definition 2 S 0 Disabled Default 1 1 Enabled Bit 0 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 0 No Link 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Dup IP Addr Read Only 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Disabled Read Write Yes 0 No Link 12 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Dup IP Addr Read Only 0 Rea
113. OOL 16 Timer descriptor 5 Get International Timer Text STRINGN Name of this timer 6 Get Clock Status BOOL 32 Identifies clock status 8 Get Set Number of Leap Seconds INT Identifies the current number of Leap Seconds 9 Get Clock Options B00L 32 Identifies the optional functionality available in the device s System Clock 10 Get Set Clock Options Enable B00L 32 Identifies which of the clock s options are enabled 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Host DPI Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal Ox9F Decimal 159 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix To access Device parameters use the DPI Parameter Object Class Code 0x93 Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Device Example Description Hex Dec 0x0000 0x3FFF 10 16383 Reserved 16384 Class Attributes Option Module 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Option Module 16385 Option Module Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 0x4800 0x4BFF 17408 18431 Port 1 16386 Option Module Parameter 2 Attributes 18432 19455 Port2 19456 20479 Port3 17408 Class Attributes HIM 0 4 00 Ox4FFF 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port4 17409 HIM Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 0x5800 OxSBFF 21504 22527 Port5 17410 HIM P
114. PI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F cannot access DPI device parameters For example if a 20 750 DNET option module is in Port 4 its Host parameters can be accessed but not its DPI device parameters See Host Parameter Object on page 177 for instance parameter numbering There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process The details of each step will vary depending on the type of controller being used See the documentation for your controller IMPORTANT There must be a request message and a response message for all Explicit Messages whether you are reading or writing data Figure 23 Explicit Message Process Set up and send Explicit Message Request Complete Explicit Message L 1 Retrieve Explicit 4 o Message Response irum 9 Event Description o You format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message request to the scanner or bridge module download e The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the network e The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner The data is stored in the scanner buffer 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 ControlLogix Controller Examples Using Explicit Mess
115. Parameter Number 5 Parameter Value 5 Pad 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value 7 Pad 8 Parameter Number 8 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Value 9 Pad 10 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Number 11 Parameter Value 11 Pad 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Parameter Value 13 Pad 14 Parameter Number 14 Parameter Number 15 Parameter Value 15 Pad 16 Parameter Number 16 Parameter Number 17 Parameter Value 17 Pad 18 Parameter Number 18 Parameter Number 19 Parameter Value 19 Pad 20 Parameter Number 20 Parameter Number 21 Parameter Value 21 Pad 22 Parameter Number 22 Parameter Number 23 Parameter Value 23 Pad 24 Parameter Number 24 Parameter Number 25 Parameter Value 25 Pad 26 Parameter Number 26 Parameter Number 27 Parameter Value 27 Pad 28 Parameter Number 28 Parameter Number 29 Parameter Value 29 Pad 30 Parameter Number 30 Parameter Number 31 Parameter Value 31 Pad 32 Parameter Number 32 Parameter Number 33 Parameter Value 33 Pad 34 Parameter Number 34 Parameter Number 35 Parameter Value 35 Pad 62 Parameter Number 62 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Value 63 Pad 112 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Understanding the Status Indicators Troubleshooting Chapter 7 This chapter provides information for diagnosing and troubleshooting potential problems with th
116. Parameters on page 36 IMPORTANT New settings for some option module parameters for example Device Parameters 07 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 10 IP Addr Cfg 4 are recognized only when power is applied to the option module or it is reset After you change parameter settings cycle power or reset the option module Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuration Tools Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 This chapter provides instructions and information for setting the parameters to configure the option module Topic Page Configuration Tools 31 Using the PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM to Access Parameters 32 Setting the Option Module Node Address 32 Setting the Data Rate 38 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy Adapter mode only 39 Setting a Fault Action Adapter mode only 46 Setting Web Page Access 48 Resetting the Option Module 49 Restoring Option Module Parameters to Factory Defaults 50 Viewing the Option Module Status Using Parameters 51 Updating the Option Module Firmware 52 For a list of parameters see Appendix B Option Module Parameters For definitions of terms in this chapter see the Glossary The option module stores parameters and other information in its own nonvolatile storage NVS memory You must therefore access the option module to view and edit its parameters The following tools can be
117. Peer to Peer hierarchies the devices exchanging data must be on the same IP subnet See IP Addresses in the Glossary for information about IP subnets Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Enabling Datalinks To Write Data The controller output image controller outputs to drive can have 0 to 16 additional 32 bit parameters Datalinks They are configured using Host Parameters 01 DL From Net 01 through Parameter 16 DL From Net 16 The number of Datalinks actively used is controlled by the connection size in the controller See the respective controller example sections in Chapter 4 for more information on setting the connection size IMPORTANT Always use the Datalink parameters in consecutive numerical order starting with the first parameter For example use Host Parameters 01 02 and 03 to configure three Datalinks to write data Otherwise the network 1 0 connection will be larger than necessary which needlessly increases controller response time and memory usage TIP When using a ControlLogix controller and an RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile version 16 00 or later there is no need to configure Datalink parameters at this time They will be assigned when configuring the RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile see Adding the Drive Option Module to the 1 0 Configuration on page 58 When using a ControlLogix controller and the Generic Profile configure the Datalink parameters now as described in this section Host Para
118. PowerFlex 750 Series slave drive set drive parameter 308 Direction Mode to 0 Unipolar to be sure that it properly follows the master drive s speed reference and commanded direction 4 Set Device Parameter 37 Fr Peer Enable to a value of 1 Cmd Ref Custom Peer 1 0 Configuration Peer I O also allows more flexibility in sending custom data over the network but requires more configuration IMPORTANT Because of the 32 bit REAL floating point Reference the following method works only if the drives transmitting and receiving are PowerFlex 750 Series drives Follow these steps to set up the master broadcast side of custom peer I O Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 6 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 Decide how many Datalink parameters you want to transmit and set Device Parameter 39 DLs To Peer Cfg to that value Determine how the Datalinks are allocated The highest numbered of the 16 Datalinks are allocated to peer I O For example if Device Parameter 39 DLs To Peer Cfg is set to 3 then Datalinks 14 15 and 16 are allocated to peer I O To avoid an overlap between Master Slave and peer I O make sure that Device Parameter 04 DLs To Net Act plus Device Parameter 39 DLs To Peer Cfg does not total more than 16 Set Host Parameters 17 through 32 DL To Net 01 16 to the parameters you want to transmit based on the allocation in ste
119. PresetSpeed2 2 0 REAL My PowerFlex_753_Drive l PresetSpeed3 2 0 REAL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l PresetSpeedt 2 0 REAL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l PresetSpeedS 0 0 REAL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive PresetSpeedS c c REAL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l PresetSpeed c c REAL Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 63 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 Figure 12 Controller Output Tags My Ponerfiex 753 Divo LLogicCommand_DecelTi ime2 My_PowerFlex_753_Drive 0 LogicCommand_SpdRefSei0 __ My_PowerFlex_753_Drive 0 LogicCommand_SpdRetSet1 My PowetFlex 753 Drive O LogicCommand SpdRefSel2 i My PowerFlex_753_Drive 0 LoocConm nd Coseision PowerFlex Saving the 1 0 Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive option module to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer 1 From the Communications menu in the RSLogix 5000 dialog box choose Download The Download dialog box appears Download Download offline project v20 Example using 20750ENETR foc PF753 to the controller Connected Controller Name v20 Example using 20750ENETR for PF 753 Type 17564 73 ControlLogix5573 Controller Path EtherNet4P 10 S1 96 80 Backplane 0 Serial Number 006058 Security No Protection DANGER Unexpected hazardou
120. R 165 Appendix EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Descriptor Attributes 166 Bit Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 1 Data Type Bit 2 000 USINT used as an array of Boolean 2 Data Type Bit 3 001 UINT used as an array of Boolean 010 USINT 8 bit integer 011 UINT 16 bit integer 100 UDINT 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not Unicode or 16 bits Unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 unsigned 1 signed 4 Hidden 0 visible 1 hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 May be the sink end of a link 1 May not be the sink end ofa link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled for example drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 111215 15 Decimal Place Bit
121. Safe Speed Monitor Module into Run mode generate a configuration signature and lock the configuration These steps also need to be performed when replacing the Safe Speed Monitor Module with a new out of the box unit 1 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 6 Operating Mode to 1 Run Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 A configuration signature is generated 2 Access Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 10 Signature ID and record the configuration signature value stored in this parameter 3 Enter the current password for the Safe Speed Monitor Module into parameter 1 Password 4 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 5 Lock State to 1 Lock These steps can be performed with a HIM drive software configuration tool or via an HMI that can trigger explicit message writes from the controller program To meet SIL CL3 PLe or Cat requirements the user must verify that the correct configuration is locked in the Safe Speed Monitor Module See the drive and Safe Speed Monitor Module documentation for more information Monitoring ADC Progress The time it takes for the ADC process to complete will vary from seconds to several minutes depending on several factors The number of peripherals enabled for ADC e Ifa configuration signature for the drive peripheral indicates a configuration download needs to be performed for the given port
122. Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Extended Parameter Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable The referenced parameter must always be writable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference
123. T Destination Link ID DLink UINT Destination Link ID DSta USINT Destination Station number DSta USINT Destination Station number DUser USINT Destination User number DUser USINT Destination User number SLink UINT Source Link ID SLink UINT Source Link ID SSta USINT Source Station number SSta USINT Source Station number SUser USINT Source User number SUser USINT Source User number CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT STS USINT Extended Status not used for all CMDs PCCC params ARRAYofUSINT CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC results ARRAY of USINT CMD FNC specific result data 158 The EtherNet IP option module supports the following PCCC command types CMD FNC Description 0x06 0x03 Identify host and some status OxOF 0x67 PLC 5 typed write OxOF 0x68 PLC 5 typed read Ox0F 0x95 Encapsulate other protocol Ox0F OxA2 SLC 500 protected typed read with 3 address fields Ox0F OxAA SLC 500 protected typed write with 3 address fields Ox0F 1 SLC 500 protected typed read with 2 address fields Ox0F 0xA9 SLC 500 protected typed write with 2 address fields OxOF 0x00 Word range read Ox0F 0x01 Word range write For more information regarding PCCC commands see DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual publica
124. To Net 11 DL To Net 12 DL To Net 13 DL To Net 14 DL To Net 15 DL To Net 16 Sets the port number and parameter number to which the selected Datalinks should connect Each selected port parameter will be read and their values transmitted over the network to the controller These are parameters read by the controller inputs to the controller If setting the value manually the parameter value 10000 port number origination parameter number For example suppose you want to use Host Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 to read Parameter 02 of an optional 1 0 module plugged into drive Port 6 The value for Host Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 would be 60002 10000 6 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Details Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required ccc cc 159999 Read Write No O cc 159999 Read Write No Parameter No 33 34 Name and Description Comm Fit Action Sets the action that the option module and drive will take if the option module detects that 1 0 communication has been disrupted This setting is effective only if 1 0 th
125. User Manual Allen Bradley PowerFlex 20 750 ENETR Dual port EtherNet IP Option Module Firmware Revision Number 1xxx Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or
126. VS frequently the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a program that frequently uses Explicit Messages to write parameter data to NVS Datalinks do not write to NVS and should be used for frequently changed parameters ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this See Chapter 5 for information about the I O Image using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Explicit Messaging is used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates With Explicit Messaging you can configure and monitor a slave device s parameters on the network IMPORTANT Whenanexplicit message is performed by default no connection is made since it is an unconnected message When timing of the message transaction is important you can create a dedicated message connection between the controller and drive by checking the Connected box on the Communications tab message configuration dialog box during message setup These message connections are in addition to the 1 0 connection However the trade off for more message connections is decreased network performance If your application cannot tolerate this do not check the Connected box which is recommended Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 99 Chapter6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Performing Explicit Messaging TIP To message to another devi
127. ack My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus Ready Status Ready My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus Active Status Active PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus ActualDir Status Forward My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus ActualDir Status Reverse My PowerFlex 753 Drive I DriveStatus Faulted Status Faulted PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus AtSpeed Status At Speed OP Copy File Source My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Feedback Dest Speed Feedback Length 1 Figure 17 ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add on Profile for Logic Command Reference Command_Stop My PowerFlex 753 Drive O LogicCommand Stop Command Start My PowerFlex 753 Drive O LogicCommand Start Command Jog My PowerFlex 753 Drive O LogicCommand Jog1 Command Clear Faults My PowerFlex 753 Drive O LogicCommand ClearFaults lt gt Command Forward Reverse My PowerFlex 753 Drive O LogicCommand Forward Command Forward Reverse My PowerFlex 753 Drive O LogicCommand Reverse Copy File Source Speed_Reference Dest My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Reference Length 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 93 Chapter5 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All Versions Option Module Parameter Settings for ControlLogix Controller Example These option module settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this se
128. aging Adapter mode only Chapter 6 Event Description The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner s buffer upload The Explicit Message is complete For information on the maximum number of Explicit Messages that can be executed at a time see the documentation for the bridge or scanner and or controller that is being used TIP To display the Message Configuration dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software add a message instruction MSG create a new tag for the message Properties Base tag type MESSAGE data type controller scope and click the __ button in the message instruction For supported classes instances and attributes see Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only IMPORTANT The explicit messaging examples in this section can be performed using any version of RSLogix 5000 software IMPORTANT The read and write messaging examples in this section are for Device parameters which use Class Code 0x93 For Host parameters use Class Code Ox9F and format the rest of the message in the same way as these examples The Message Configuration has a Service Type of Parameter Read which is Class code OxOF Parameter Object Parameter Object is not supported in PowerFlex 750 series drives ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the va
129. agnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to be sure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page 168 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix DPI Time Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x9B 155 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of timers in the device Instance 1 is always reserved for a real time clock although a device may not support it The total number of timers can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Device Example Description Hex Dec 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Option Module 1 Real Time Clock Predefined not always supported 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 2 Timer 1 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 Port 2 3 Timer 2 0x4C00 0xAFFF 19456 20479 Port 3 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port 4
130. alid address 001 254 the option module will use that value as the lower octet of its IP address 192 168 1 xxx where xxx rotary switch settings along with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 and a gateway address of 0 0 0 0 when switches are set to 001 or a gateway address of 192 168 1 1 when switches are set from 002 254 Also the setting for Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is automatically ignored See Figure 2 and its accompanying table for all possible switch settings and their related descriptions IMPORTANT When using the Node Address switches set the network node address before power is applied because the option module uses the node address it detects when it first receives power Option Module Parameters Use option module parameters when you want more flexibility in setting up the network node address or need to communicate outside the control network using a gateway To use parameters as the source for the IP address the Node Address switches must be set to a value other than 001 254 or 888 and Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel must be set to 1 Parameters The IP address subnet mask and gateway address will then come from the values set using the associated option module parameters For details see Using Option Module Parameters on page 36 IMPORTANT If parameter values are invalid or the option module was not reset for the values to take effect the node address is established by using DHCP
131. ansfer Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network data to the PowerFlex 755 drive s embedded EtherNet IP adapter Industrial Ethernet switch and ENET1 and ENET2 network ports that provide connections for EtherNet IP star linear or device level ring DLR network topologies ENET3 DEVICE port for use with only PowerFlex 755 drives that supports the transfer of Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network data for that drive e Embedded electronic data sheet EDS files for PowerFlex 750 Series drives that eliminate the need to download an EDS file from the Rockwell Automation website Instead the EDS file is uploaded from the option module by using RSLinx software e Automatic Device Configuration ADC which is an RSLogix 5000 software version 20 or later feature that supports the automatic download of configuration data This occurs after the Logix controller establishes an EtherNet IP network connection to a PowerFlex 750 Series drive firmware revision 4 001 or later and its associated peripherals Captive screws to secure and ground the module to the drive Switches to set a network node address before applying power to the drive or you can disable the switches and use a BOOTP server a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server or option module parameters to configure the IP address Compatibility with various configuration tools to configure the option module and host
132. ansmit the most recent data because it does not use acknowledgements or retries A structure data type that you define during the development of an application for example to convert 32 bit REAL parameter data for written and read values to correctly display them in human readable format The process of updating firmware in a device The option module can be updated using various Allen Bradley software tools See Updating the Option Module Firmware on page 52 for more information When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the option module and drive can respond with zero data Zero data results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command Reference and Datalink data If the drive was running and using the Reference from the option module it will stay running but at zero Reference 194 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 ADC Automatic Device Configuration 67 189 applying power to the option module 26 Assembly object 155 attentions 14 baud rate see data rate bit definitions of Logic Command Status word for PowerFlex 750 Series drives 187 BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol definition 189 free server application 189 using 32 bridge 189 C cable Ethernet 23 24 CIP Common Industrial Protocol 189 dasses of IP addresses 192 Comm Fit Action Host parameter 147 commissioning the option module 30 communication card see option module compatible produc
133. apter mode only Bit Description 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved 182 Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 1 Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 10 Decimal Places Multiplier x Base Offset 0 Decimal Places Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Allocation Size in bytes Class Instance Number Value 0x4D Yes No Get_Attributes Scattered 4 4 0 4 No Set_Attributes Scattered 4 4 The table below lists the parameters for the Get_Attributes_Scattered and Set_Attributes_Scattered object specific service Name DataType Description Parameter
134. arameter 2 Attributes 22528 23551 Port6 0x5C00 Ox5FFF 23552 24575 Port7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 Ox6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 Port12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 Port13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password UINT 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum UINT Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter UINT First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision UINT 2 0 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error UINT The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Link
135. arameters folder When viewed with the 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM these parameters appear in the DEV PARAM folder IMPORTANT Some Device parameters are not applicable when operating the option module in Adapter mode while others are not applicable in Tap mode Therefore these non applicable parameters are labeled Reserved in the Adapter and Tap mode operation parameter tables in Appendix B Host parameters are used to configure the option module Datalink transfer and various fault actions with the drive Host parameters when viewed with DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software appear below the 20 750 ENETR listing in the treeview in a separate Host Parameters folder When viewed with the 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM these parameters appear in the HOST PARAM folder IMPORTANT When operating the option module in Tap mode Host parameters are not supported Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Getting Started Chapter 1 Com patible Products At the time of publication the option module is compatible with the following PowerFlex 753 drives all firmware revisions PowerFlex 755 drives firmware revision 1 010 or later 1 1 When the option module is connected to an incompatible drive its PORT status indicator will flash orange indicating that it is not compatible with the drive Required Equipment Some of the equipment that is required for use with the option module is shipped with th
136. ask and a gateway address therefore you do not have to configure these using the parameters in the option module BOOTP can make it easier to administer an Ethernet network A free version of the Rockwell Software BOOTP DHCP Server can be accessed at http www ab com networks network device that can route messages from one network to another A bridge also refers to a communication module in a ControlLogix controller that connects the controller to a network See also scanner CIP is the transport and application layer protocol used for messaging over EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet networks The protocol is used for implicit messaging real time I O and explicit messaging configuration data collection and diagnostics An Allen Bradley software tool that lets users electronically update firmware on printed circuit boards A controller also called programmable logic controller is a solid state control system that has a user programmable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I O control logic timing counting report generation communication arithmetic and data file manipulation A controller consists of a central processor input output interface and memory See also Scanner The speed at which data is transferred on the EtherNet IP network You can set the adapter to a data rate of 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex or 100Mbps Half Duplex If anoth
137. at controls the drive is transmitted through the option module When communication is re established the drive will automatically receive commands over the network again Option Module Parameters Default Values Type Reset Required Appendix B 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Host A Idle Fit Action Parameter 33 Comm Fit Action lets you determine the action of the option module and connected drive if 1 0 communication is disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You may configure this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Default 0 Fault Sets the action that the option module and drive will take if the option module detects that the controller is in program mode or faulted This setting is effective only if 1 0 that controls the drive is transmitted through the option module When the controller is put back in Run mode the drive will automatically receive Values 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Flt commands over the network again A Type Read Write Reset Re
138. atalink being used must be assigned to a specific parameter in the drive or connected peripheral see Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy Adapter mode only on page 39 or Custom Peer I O Configuration on page 42 If this is not done the controller will receive or send placeholder data instead of actual drive or peripheral parameter values 5 Placethe controller in Remote Run or Run Mode Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 85 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 Notes 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 About 1 0 Messaging Chapter 5 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to control configure and monitor a PowerFlex 750 Series drive using the configured I O Topic Page About 1 0 Messaging 87 Understanding the 1 0 Image 88 Using Logic Command Status 89 Using Reference Feedback 89 Using Datalinks 90 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 91 ControlLogix Controller Example 92 publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this On CIP based netw
139. ation STRUCT of UINT Fault code STRUCT of Fault source USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRING 16 Fault text STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used UINT Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of UINT Fault code STRUCT of Fault source USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 2 Get International Fault Text STRINGN Text describing the fault with support for Unicode Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 DPI Alarm Object EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x98 152 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for alarms or warnings Option Modules do not support this object Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of alarms supported by the queue The maximum number of alarms can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Device Example Description Hex
140. been verified a pop up dialog box appears which synchronizes ports from the online drive to the project to be sure that the correct Datalinks are assigned Click OK If the Differences Found dialog box appears which is typical click Download This will download the project settings from the controller to the drive and its connected option module If Upload is clicked the drive and option module settings are uploaded to the controller Differences Found Differences were found between the project and the drive How do you want to proceed Upload Download Cancel Help Show Details TIP On subsequent connections to the drive after the initial download dick Upload The I O Configuration Differences dialog box appears VO Configuration Differences Project v20 Example using 207508NETR for P753 My Powecflex 753 Drive Drive Etherhiet IP10 91 95 101 input Data Output Data Project StopModeA 370 StopModeB 271 AccelTimet 535 AccelTime2 538 DecelTimet 537 DecelTime2 638 JogAccDecTime 539 JogSpeedt 556 JonSinemd 5 7 Datainks in the drive do not match the project 1 0 configuration Click the Use Project button to configure the drive to match the project settings Tf you wish to change the I O configuration in the project you must go offine with the controller and change the 10 configuration in the Module Definition Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012
141. bled for a drive in a previous project it will remain disabled IfADC was enabled for a drive using version 4 01 Drive AOPs and that project was later updated to version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs it will remain enabled Version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs also have an ADC icon on the Drive tab to show general ADC enable disable status for the drive Icon Meaning at No ports on the drive have ADC enabled At least one port on the drive has ADC enabled ADC is not supported Clicking the ADC icon will launch the ADC configuration dialog box This provides a single convenient location to enable disable ADC for any of the ports on the drive Configuring a PowerFlex 750 Series Drive for ADC IMPORTANT ADCis supported by only PowerFlex 753 drives with firmware 7 001 or later and PowerFlex 755 drives with firmware 4 001 or later ADC is configured within the AOP of the PowerFlex 750 Series drive Start by creating or opening a PowerFlex 750 Series drive in the RSLogix 5000 I O Configuration folder Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 69 Chapter 4 70 Configuring the 1 0 1 Open the drive General tab dialog box E Module Properties My_EtherNet_IP_DLR_Bridge 0 PowerFlex 753 ENETR 6 1 General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Diive Type PowerFlex 753ENETR AC Drive via ENETR Vendor Allen Bradley My_EtherNet_IP_DLR_Bridge Ethernet Address Name My_P
142. box to configure message to write a single parameter 104 Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the DPI Parameter Object in the option module Service Type 1 Set Attribute Single This service is used to write a parameter value Service Code 10 Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 5 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 535 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 9 9 or A Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Source Element Accel_Time_1 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the option module drive Source Length 4 bytes 6 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Leave blank not applicable Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My PowerFlex 755 Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Write Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to read parameter
143. ce in a different drive port see the Instance table in Appendix C DPI Parameter Object section on page 163 for Device parameters e Host DPI Parameter Object section on page 177 for Host parameters In the Message Configuration dialog box set the Instance field to an appropriate value within the range listed for the port in which the device resides IMPORTANT PowerFlex 750 Series drives have explicit messaging limitations Table 5 shows the EtherNet IP Object Class code compatibilities for these drives Table 5 Explicit Messaging Class Code Compatibility with PowerFlex 750 Series Drive EtherNet IP Object Class Code Compatibility Explicit Messaging Function Parameter Object Ox0F No Single parameter reads writes DPI Parameter Object 0x93 Yes 1 with limitations Single and scattered parameter reads writes Host Parameter Object Ox9F Yes 0 with limitations Single and scattered parameter reads writes 1 Enables access to drive parameters Port 0 device parameters Ports 1 6 only and Host parameters Ports 7 14 only For example DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 can access a Safe Speed Monitor option module in Port 6 However Class code 0x93 cannot access for example the Host parameters in a 24V 1 0 option module in Port 5 See DPI Parameter Object on page 163 for instance parameter numbering 2 Enables access to drive parameters Port 0 and Host parameters for all ports 1 14 Host D
144. cimal Decimal 0x67 103 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x4B No Yes Execute_PCCC 0x4 No Yes Execute_DH Instances Supports Instance 1 Class Attributes Not supported Instance Attributes Not supported Message Structure for Execute_PCCC Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description Length USINT Length of requestor ID Length USINT Length of requestor ID Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Serial Number ASA serial number of requestor Serial Number UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Other Product Specific Identifier of user task etc on the requestor Other Product Specific Identifier of user task etc on the requestor CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code Not used for all CMDs EXT STS USINT Extended status Not used for all CMDs PCCC params ARRAY of USINT CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC results ARRAY of USINT CMD FNC specific result data Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 157 AppendixC Objects Adapter mode only Message Structure for Execute_DH Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description DLink UIN
145. connected to a valid port on a DPI product 11 DPI Port Changed The DPI port changed after startup 12 DPI Host Reset The drive sent a reset event message 13 DPI Baud 125kbps The option module detected that the drive was communicating at 125 Kbps 14 DPI Baud 500kbps The option module detected that the drive was communicating at 500 Kbps 15 DPI Host Invalid The option module was connected to an incompatible product 16 DPI Dup Port Another peripheral with the same port number is already in use 17 DPI Type 0 Logon The option module has logged in for Type 0 control 18 DPI Type 0 Time The option module has not received a Type 0 status message within the specified time 19 DPI DL Logon The option module has logged into a Datalink 20 DPI DL Error The drive rejected an attempt to log in to a Datalink because the Datalink is not supported or is used by another peripheral 21 DPI DL Time The option module has not received a Datalink message within the specified time 22 DPI Ctrl Disable The option module has sent a Soft Control Disable command to the drive 23 DPI Ctrl Enable The option module has sent a Soft Control Enable command to the drive 24 DPI Msg Timeout A Client Server message sent by the option module was not completed within 1 second 25 DPI Manual Reset The option module was reset by changing its Reset Module parameter SI Events 26 SI Online The option module has logged into the Serial Interface Communication 27 SI Logon Error The op
146. ction Option Module Host Parameter Value Description 01 DL From Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 02 DL From Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 03 DL From Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 04 DL From Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 05 DL From Net 05 537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 06 DL From Net 06 538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 07 DL From Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 08 DL From Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 09 DL From Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 10 DL From Net 10 571 Points to drive 571 Preset Speed 1 11 DL From Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 12 DL From Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 13 DL From Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 14 DL From Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 15 DL From Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 16 DL From Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 17 DL To Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 18 DL To Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 19 DL To Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 20 DL To Net 04 5
147. cts Explicit messaging where connected is NOT chosen which is typically the default DriveExplorer connections to the drive Requested Packet Interval RPI 2 ms minimum Packet Rate Drive Protocol Data Rates Up to 1000 total 1 0 packets per second 500 in and 500 out DPI 500 kbps Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 137 AppendixA Specifications When Operating in Tap Mode Network Protocol EtherNet IP Data Rates 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex or 100 Mbps Half Duple Connection Limits 30 TCP connections 16 simultaneous explicit messaging connections The following activity uses a CIP connection Explicit messaging where connected is chosen for example in a checkbox in RSLogix 5000 software The following activity does not use a CIP connection Explicit messaging where connected is NOT chosen which is typically the default Drive Protocol DPI Data Rates 500 kbps Electrical Consumption Drive 250 mA at 14 VDC supplied by the host drive Network None Mechanical Dimensions Height 68 mm 2 7 inches Length 150 mm 5 9 inches Width 26 mm 1 0 inches Weight 62 g 2 1 oz Environmental Temperature Operating 10 50 C 14 122 F Storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Atmosphere Important The option module must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere conta
148. d of the link for negotiating with remote devices Secondary DNS Optional the address of the secondary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices when the primary DNS server is unavailable Domain Name The text name corresponding to the numeric IP address that was assigned to the server that controls the network 1 For definitions of these terms see the Glossary 6 Click OK to apply the settings Devices on the network issuing BOOTP DHCP requests appear in the BOOTP DHCP Request History list 34 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 7 Inthe BOOTP DHCP Request History list either double click the option module s Ethernet Address MAC noted in step 2 or click New in the Relation List The New Entry dialog box appears In the first instance the Ethernet Address MAC is automatically entered In the latter instance it must be manually entered New Entry Ethemet Address 00 00 5 5 37 IP Address 10 91 96 101 Hostname PF755 DLR Extruder 1A Descnplion Cx m 8 Edit the following Box Type IP Address A unique IP address for the option module Host Name Optional Description Optional 1 For definition of this term see the Glossary 9 Click OK to apply the settings The option module appears in the Relation List with the new settings
149. data 1 Set the values of only the required number of contiguous drive to controller Datalinks needed to read data from the drive and that are to be included in the network I O connection 2 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 The option module is configured to send output data to the master controller You must now configure the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the option module See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Setting the Option Module to Transmit Peer to Peer Data Peer to peer communication can be set up as a simple peer I O configuration custom peer I O configuration Simple Peer 1 0 Configuration The most common use of peer I O is to take the Logic Command and Reference from one drive and repeat it over Ethernet to one or more other drives If scaling of the Reference is needed to enable drives to run at different but related speeds use drive Parameter 609 IrmPct RefA Stpt The EtherNet IP option module provides a simplified configuration method for simple peer I O IMPORTANT Because of the 32 bit REAL floating point Reference the following method works only if the drives transmitting and receiving are PowerFlex 750 Series drives Peer to peer communication only works between drives with a 20 750 ENETR option module or PowerFlex 755 drives with the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Follow these steps to set up the master broadcast side of simple peer I O R
150. de 140 Parameters for Tap Mode 150 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Table of Contents Appendix Supported Data RIED REIS DRUG 153 Identity Ob ects acess eps epu CU CONT Sulu Sq VU 154 Assembly Object RS RE FER M E IIS EDU REP REETE 155 Register stesse eene Ms iare ee ee teu Mawes 156 le der T PM 157 DPE Device OBIeCposas a de UR EATER d CES 160 DPl Parameter toes Ut ode p is tA o UN 163 DPT Baul Object es tei at tesa talon eh Ote ta 169 DPT Alarm oe seo treo ERE ange e EQ PRAES 171 DPI Diagnostic ODbJEGE 5 epo po Renee up dede hg REUS 173 DPI Tone dd E OE E ER 175 Host DPI Parameter Object etas 177 TCP IP Interface Hs 183 Ethernet Link Objects eeu Roi E era Em 185 Appendix D Logic Command Word dep tr atl EE AS 187 L pie Status Word shake Y e du 188 Glossary Index Table of Contents Notes 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Conventions Used in This Manual Rockwell Automation Support Roc
151. dlessly increases controller response time and memory usage TIP When using a ControlLogix controller and an RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile version 16 00 or later there is no need to configure Datalink parameters at this time They will be assigned when configuring the RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profile see Adding the Drive Option Module to the 1 0 Configuration on page 58 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 When using a ControlLogix controller and the Generic Profile configure the Datalink parameters now as described in this section Host Parameters 17 DL To Net 01 through 32 DL To Net 16 configure which parameters in the drive option module or any other connected peripheral send the values to the network The PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM DriveExplorer software or DriveExecutive software can be used to select the drive or peripheral by port number and the parameter by name As an alternate method the parameter value can be set manually by number using this formula To Net Parameter Value 10000 Port Number Origination Parameter Number For example suppose you want to use Host Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 to read Parameter 2 of an optional I O module plugged into drive Port 6 Using the formula the value for Host Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 would be 10000 6 2 60002 Follow these steps to enable Datalinks to read
152. dule s present subnet mask A value of 0 appears if the option module 60 Subnet Act 2 does not currently have a subnet mask 62 Subnet Act 4 Subnet Act 1 Subnet Act 2 Subnet Act 3 Subnet Act 4 63 Gateway Act 1 Value of each byte in the option module s present gateway address A value of 0 appears if the option amp Gateway Act 2 module does not currently have a gateway address 65 Gateway Act 3 255 255 255 66 Gateway Act 4 Gateway Act 1 Gateway Act 2 Gateway Act 3 Gateway Act 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 121 Chapter7 Troubleshooting Table 11 Tap Mode Diagnostic Items Continued No Name Description 67 Net Rx Overruns The number of receive buffer overruns reported by the Ethernet hardware 68 Net Rx Packets The number of Ethernet packets that the option module has received 69 Net Rx Errors The number of receive errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 70 Net Tx Packets The number of Ethernet packets that the option module has sent 71 Net Tx Errors The number of transmit errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 72 Reserved 73 Net Addr Sw The present value of the option module node address rotary switches 74 MDIX Status Indicates the type of cable connected to the option module s ports 1 ENET1 network port P2 ENET2 network port ENET3 DEVICE port Bit 0 P1 Normal Bit 1 P1 Swapped Bit 2 P2 Normal
153. dy 0 Ready 1 Reset Module 2 Set Defaults Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the option module is transmitting 1 0 that controls the drive the drive may fault when you reset the option module Determine how your drive will 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Write No Read Write No Parameter No 28 29 30 31 Name and Description DLs Fr Peer Cfg Sets the number of peer to drive Datalinks parameters that are used for peer 1 0 The Datalinks being used are allocated from the end of the list For example if this parameter s value is set to 3 Datalinks 14 16 are allocated for the 3 selected Datalinks The Datalinks allocated for peer 1 0 cannot overlap with other assigned DL From Net 01 16 parameters NOTE The option module allows the peer input configuration parameters to be written while peer inputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer inputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the option module is power cycled or reset DLs Fr Peer Act Displays the value of Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg at the time the option module was reset This is the number of actual peer to drive Datalinks that the option module is expecting Logic Src Cfg Controls which of the peer to drive Datalinks contain the Logic Command for the drive The value zero specifies that none of the Datalinks contain the drive s Lo
154. e UINT Next UINT Previous UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset USINT 3 Link USINT Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor UDINT Extended Descriptor see page 181 22 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Read Full BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad word always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset B00L 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 ACONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to be sure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page 182 3 Do NOT continually write parameter data to NVS See the at
155. e action of the option module and connected drive if communication is disrupted the controller is idle peer 1 0 is disrupted or explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted By default these parameters fault the drive You may configure these parameters so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected network cable controller in idle state or explicit message control disruption Changing the Fault Action Set the values of Host Parameters 33 Comm Flt Action 34 Idle Flt Action 35 Peer Flt Action and 36 Msg Flt Action to any of these responses Value Action Description 0 Fault The drive is faulted and stopped Default 1 Stop The drive is stopped but not faulted 2 Zero Data The drive is sent 0 for output data This does not command a stop 3 Hold Last The drive continues in its present state 4 Send Flt Cfg The drive is sent the data that you set in the fault configuration parameters Host Parameters 37 FIt Cfg Logic 38 Fit Cfg Ref and 39 FIt Cfg DL 01 through 54 Flt Cfg DL 16 Figure 9 Edit Fault Action HIM Screens 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3
156. e module but some you must supply yourself Equipment Shipped with the Option Module When you unpack the option module verify that the package includes the following One 20 750 ENETR Dual port EtherNet IP Option Module Q One short Ethernet cable spare part catalog number 1585J M8CBJM 0M3 for Tap mode use only with PowerFlex 755 drives One Network Communication Option Card Installation Instructions publication 750COM IN002 User supplied Equipment To install and configure the option module you must supply the following A small screwdriver Q Ethernet cable for details see the EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication 148 available on the ODVA website at http odva org Home ODVATECHNOLOGIES EtherNetIP EtherNetIPLibrary tabid 76 Default aspx Configuration tool such as the following PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM DriveExplorer software version 6 01 or later DriveExecutive standalone software version 5 01 or later or bundled with the DriveTools SP suite version 5 01 or later BOOTP version 2 1 or later or DHCP Server for network setup only Controller configuration software such as RSLogix 5000 software A computer connection to the EtherNet IP network Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 13 Chapter1 Getting Started Safety Precautions 14 Please read the following safety precautions carefully
157. e option module and network Topic Page Understanding the Status Indicators 113 Indications for Adapter Mode Operation 114 Indications for Tap Mode Operation 116 Viewing Option Module Diagnostic Items 118 Viewing and Clearing Events 122 The option module has four status indicators They can be viewed with the drive cover removed The indicators operate differently in Adapter mode than Tap mode See the respective section for details TTE QD Drive Control Pod drive shown with cover removed 78 G Gl Item Adapter Mode Operation Tap Mode Operation Indicator Name Description See Indicator Name Description See o PORT DPI Connection Status page 114 OK Option Module Status page 116 e MOD Option Module Status page 114 LINK 1 ENET1 Network Port Status page 116 e NETA Network Connection Status page 115 LINK 2 ENET2 Network Port Status page 117 4 Option Module Transmission Status 115 LINK 3 ENET3 Network Port Status page 117 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 113 Chapter7 Troubleshooting Indications for Adapter Mode Use the following sections to troubleshoot the Adapter mode of operation Operation PORT S
158. e stored in the controller have been installed on the computer running RSLogix 5000 software Verify that a CompactFlash or other storage card has been installed in the controller Use RSLogix 5000 software to go online with the controller in Program mode Download your program if you have not done so already In the treeview right click the controller folder at the top of the Controller Organizer and choose Properties On the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab fa Controller Properties v20 Example using 20750ENETR for PF753 Major Faults Menor Faut SFC Execution pl Redundancy Nonvolatie Memo Securty Inhibt Automatic Fimware Update Click Load Store Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 75 Chapter 4 76 Configuring the 1 0 The Nonvolatile Memory Load Store dialog box appears Nonvolatile Memory Load Store Image in Nonvolatie Memory v20 Example using 20750ENETR for PF753 17564 73 Control ogo5573 Controller 2012 On Powe Up Run Remote Only 270 Enable and Store Files to Image Y lt Store 9 From the Automatic Firmware Update pull down menu choose Enable and Store Files to Image 10 Click lt Store You may see two different continue confirmation dialog boxes relating to communication disruptions and erasure of the current contents of the storage card If okay click Yes on either dialog box
159. e that will send 1 0 e Check the IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches for correct operation Check the amount of traffic on the network Steady Red A duplicate IP address fault has been detected Configure the option module to use a unique IP address and cycle power The DHCP lease has expired Flashing Green The option module is operating normally but does not have any Place the controller in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device that will CIP connections 1 0 or explicit send 1 0 Program the controller or peer device to recognize and transmit 1 0 or make a message connection to the option module Configure the option module for the program in the controller or the 1 0 from the peer device Steady Green Status Off The option module is operating normally and has at least No action required connection 1 0 or explicit NET B Status Indicator Adapter Mode This green LED indicates the status of the option module transmitting on the network as shown in the table below Cause Corrective Actions The option module is not transmitting on the network If NET A indicator is off e Securely connect and ground the option module to the drive by fully inserting it into the drive port and tightening its two captive screws to the recommended torque and connect the option module to the network using an Ethernet cable e Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector
160. ed to take an existing configured Safe Speed Monitor Module for example replacing the drive and reusing the existing Module out of Run mode to allow the controller to download the configuration to the Safe Speed Monitor Module Note that these manual steps may need to be performed with the Ethernet cable disconnected from the drive as the controller s attempts to configure the Safe Speed Monitor Module will include locking out writes from other sources such as the HIM 1 Inhibit the drive s connection or disconnect the communication card through which the controller is trying to configure the Safe Speed Monitor Module using ADC 2 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 1 Password to the Module s current password 3 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 5 Lock State to 0 Unlock 4 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 6 Operating Mode to 0 Program 5 Ifthe Safe Speed Monitor Module s current password is not 0 change the password of the Module to 0 6 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 1 Password to the Module s current password 7 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 13 New Password to 0 8 Set Safe Speed Monitor Module parameter 17 Password Command to 1 Change PW 9 Uninhibit the connection or reconnect the cable The controller can download the new configuration including the new password The following manual steps are required to put the
161. ent UDINT Unicast packets sent UDINT Non unicast packets sent UDINT Outbound packets discarded UDINT Outbound packets with errors Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 185 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 5 Get Media Counters STRUCT of RX Received TX Transmitted UDINT RX frames not having integral number of octets long UDINT RX frames not passing FCS check UDINT TX frames having one collision UDINT TX frames having multiple collisions UDINT Number of times of SQE test error message UDINT TX Frames delayed first attempt by busy medium UDINT Collisions detected later than 512 bit times in trans UDINT TX frames failing due to excessive collisions UDINT TX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer TX error UDINT Times of carrier sense condition loss during trans UDINT RX frames exceeding the maximum frame size UDINT RX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer RX error 6 Set Interface Control STRUCT of WORD Control bits UINT Forced interface speed 7 Get Interface Type USINT Type of interface 2 twisted pair 10 Get Interface Label SHORT STRING 1 ENET1 network port 2 ENET2 network port 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Appendix D Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 750 Series Drives This appendix presents the definitions of the Logic
162. equire a router which could be a layer 3 switch to send out IGMP polls to learn what devices are part of the multicast group Some layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping without a router sending polls If your control system is a standalone network or is required to continue performing if the router is out of service make sure the switch you are using supports IGMP snooping without a router being present See Appendix A for the number of CIP connections supported by the option module Verify that you have all required equipment See Required Equipment on page 13 electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the option module If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 2 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The option module contains IMPORTANT The option module has EtherNet IP embedded switch technology and ENET1 and ENET2 network ports to connect to a linear or device level ring DLR network in a single subnet You cannot use ENET1 and ENET 2 network ports as two network interface cards connected to two different subnets Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Setting the Operating Mode Installing the Option Module Chapter 2 The option module can be operated in Adapter mode default Tap
163. er Addr 2 Fr Peer Addr 3 Fr Peer Addr 4 Sets the IP address bytes that specify the device from which the option module receives consumes peer 1 0 data 255 255 255 255 Fr Peer Addr 1 Fr Peer Addr 2 Fr Peer Addr 3 Fr Peer Addr 4 Important The Fr Peer Addr must be on the same subnet as the option module See IP Addresses on page 192 for more information NOTE The option module allows the peer input configuration parameters to be written while peer inputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer inputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the option module is power cycled or reset Fr Peer Enable Controls whether peer 1 0 input is operating A value of 0 Off turns off peer 1 0 input A value of 1 Cmd Ref overrides the settings in Device Parameters 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg 30 Logic Src Cfg and 31 Ref Src Cfg and automatically uses peer Datalink 01 as the drive s present Logic Command and peer Datalink 02 as the drive s Reference A value of 2 Custom enables peer 1 0 input using the Datalink count and settings provided by the user If the value of this parameter is changed from 1 Cmd Ref to 2 Custom or from 2 Custom to 1 Cmd Ref while peer 1 0 is running the drive will be commanded to do its Peer Fault Action before the peer input mode is changed Fr Peer Status Displays the status of the consumed peer 1 0 input connection
164. er Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and peer 1 0 communication is disrupted Host Parameter 36 Msg Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted Fit Cfg DL 01 Fit Cfg DL 02 Fit Cfg DL 03 Fit Cfg DL 04 Fit Cfg DL 05 Fit Cfg DL 06 Fit Cfg DL 07 Fit Cfg DL 08 Fit Cfg DL 09 Fit Cfg DL 10 Fit Cfg DL 11 Fit Cfg DL 12 Fit Cfg DL 13 Fit Cfg DL 14 Fit Cfg DL 15 Fit Cfg DL 16 Sets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the drive if any of the following is true Host Parameter 33 Comm Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg 1 0 communication is disrupted Host Parameter 34 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle Host Parameter 35 Peer Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and peer 1 0 communication is disrupted Host Parameter 36 Msg Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Option Module Parameters Appendix B Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required 0 3 40282 x 10 3 40282 x 1028 Read Write No coc c ccc cocco
165. er Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero Ifthis bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute Ifthis bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set 26 NotWritable WhilelO Active This parameter cannot be written if the 1 0 data being exchanged between the Host and the peripheral is valid 27 Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 181 Appendix EtherNet IP Objects Ad
166. er device on the network sets or auto negotiates the data rate you can set the adapter to automatically detect the data rate A Datalink is a type of pointer used by PowerFlex 750 Series drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow specified parameter values to be accessed or changed without using explicit messages When active each 32 bit Datalink in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive consumes 4 bytes in the input image table and or 4 bytes in the output image table of the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 189 Glossary Device level Ring DLR DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DriveExplorer Software DriveTools SP Software Duplex EDS Electronic Data Sheet Files EtherNet IP Network 190 An Ethernet topology that consist of multiple devices configured in a circle style connection implemented at the device level and with no additional switches required DHCP lets the option module configure itself dynamically at restart if the network has a DHCP server The DHCP server assigns the option module a preconfigured IP address a subnet mask and a gateway address therefore you do not have to configure these using the parameters in the option module DHCP can make it easier to administer an Ethernet network A free version of the Rockwell Software BOOTP DHCP Server can be accessed at http www ab com networks tool for monitoring and configuring A
167. erify that drive Parameter 930 Speed Ref Source is reporting that the source of the Reference to the drive Port 0 is the port in which the option module is installed for this example Port 4 Reference This ensures that any Reference commanded from the network can be monitored by using drive Parameter 002 Commanded SpdRef If a Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 29 Chapter 2 Installing the Option Module problem occurs this verification step provides the diagnostic capability to determine whether the drive option module or the network is the cause Ifhard wired discrete digital inputs are not used to control the drive verify that all unused digital input drive parameters are set to 0 Not Used Commissioning the Option To commission the option module you must set a unique network node address Module 30 See the Glossary for details about IP addresses When using the Node Address switches see Setting the Node Address on page 20 for details When not using these switches BOOTP or DHCP server or option module parameters can be used to set the node address after connecting the option module to the network and applying power to the drive By default the option module is configured so that you must set the node address using a DHCP server For details see Using a BOOTP or DHCP Server on page 32 To set the node address using option module parameters see Using Option Module
168. es a database from an online network drive Clicking this button displays an RSLinx software RSWho dialog box Browse to the online drive for this example PowerFlex 753 select it and click OK The database will be uploaded and stored on the computer Thereafter close the Module Definition dialog box and then re open it to display the new revision Web Update When a drive is not available online opens the Allen Bradley Drives Web Updates website to download a specific database file After downloading the file close the Module Definition dialog box and then re open it to display the new revision Match Drive Use this button when the drive being added to the network matches the drive profile revision rating Datalinks configuration settings and so forth of an existing online network drive Click this button to conveniently create a duplicate drive profile from the online drive and automatically load this identical information into the Module Definition dialog box This eliminates the need to manually enter the information each time a new drive with a matching profile is added to the network Electronic Keying Compatible Module The Compatible Module setting for Electronic Keying verifies that the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore be sure that you have set the correct revision in this dialog box See the online Help for additional in
169. ese non applicable diagnostic items are labeled Reserved in Table 10 and Table 11 Diagnostic Items for Adapter Mode Operation Table 10 Adapter Mode Diagnostic Items No Name Description 2 Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this option module 3 Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this option module 4 Common Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this option module 5 Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this option module 6 Feedback The present value of the Feedback being received from the drive by this option module 7 Input Size The size ofthe input image in bytes transferred from the network to the drive 8 Output Size The size ofthe output image in bytes transferred from the drive to the network 9 DL Fr Net Avail The number of Host DL From Net xx Datalinks currently available to the option module 10 DL To Net Avail The number of Host DL To Net xx Datalinks currently available to the option module 11 DL Fr Net 01 Val The present value of respective Host DL From Net xx parameter being transmitted to the drive by this option module If not using a Datalink its respective value should be zero 12 DL Fr Net 02 Val 13 DL Fr Net 03 Val 14 DL Fr Net 04 Val 15 DL Fr Net 05 Val
170. et up the automatic method described above to enable DeviceLogix after ADC you can still do so manually To enable the DeviceLogix program set DeviceLogix Parameter 53 DLX Operation to 0 Enable Logic by using one of these methods e Anexplicit message in the Logix program to write to the parameter P 5 81x prog P A HIM or drive software tool to set the parameter Note that after setting DeviceLogix Parameter 53 to 0 Enable Logic the value will be changed by the drive to 6 Logic Enabled to indicate operation status IMPORTANT Donotset DeviceLogix parameter 53 DLX Operation to 0 Enable Logic in the Add on Profile configuration before saving the configuration to the controller This setting would lock the module and prevent writing the higher numbered parameters thus causing the ADC download to fail Special Considerations When Using a 20 750 51 Safe Speed Monitor Module There are special considerations when using ADC with the 20 750 S1 Safe Speed Monitor Module Safety requires manual intervention by the user before the drive can become operational Although a manual step is required ADC can still be used IMPORTANT Firmware Supervisor cannot be used to update the 20 750 51 Safe Speed Monitor Module firmware This is due to unique upgrade components with its safety core It can be manually upgraded using ControlFLASH a 1203 USB Serial Converter and the appropriate upgrade file In addition
171. ey to restore MOST Device and Host parameters to factory defaults or press the ALL soft key to restore ALL parameters Or Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 press the ESC soft key to cancel IMPORTANT When performing a Set Defaults the drive may detect a conflict and then not allow this function to occur If this happens first resolve the conflict and then repeat this Set Defaults procedure Common reasons for a conflict include the drive running or a controller in Run mode 9 Reset the option module using Device Parameter 25 Reset Module or by cycling power to the drive so that the restored parameters take effect Viewing the Option Module Status Using Parameters The following parameters provide information about the status of the option module You can view these parameters at any time When Operating in Adapter Mode Option Module Device Parameter 03 DLs From Net Act Description The number of controller to drive Datalinks that are included in the network 1 0 connection controller outputs 04 DLs To Net Act The number of drive to controller Datalinks that are included in the network 1 0 connection controller inputs 06 Net Addr Src Displays the source from which the option module IP address is taken The source is determined by the option module Node Address switch settings shown in Figure 2 and the value of Device
172. f 1 0 communication is disrupted the controller is idle Peer 1 0 is disrupted or explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted By default these parameters fault the drive You may configure these parameters so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or a controller in idle state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists When a system is configured for the first time there may be unintended or incorrect machine motion Disconnect the motor from the machine or process during initial system testing ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Quick Start Getting Started Chapter 1 This section is provided to help experienced users quickly start using the option module in Adapter mode or Tap mode If you are unsure how to complete a step refer to the referenced chapter Adapter Mode of Opera
173. ference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Extended Parameter Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be writable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Paramet
174. formation on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Drives do not require keying and so Disable Keying is recommended When using RSLogix 5000 software version 20 or later and Automatic Device Configuration ADC with Firmware Supervisor upgrade support to store firmware for the drive always choose Exact Match When using ADC see the table on page 70 for more details Drive Rating The voltage and current rating of the drive If the drive rating is not listed the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the drive rating use the Create Database Web Update or Match Drive button described above Rating Options Selects the drive power output required for the application This must match the drive s actual rating Special Types Reserved for future use Connection Parameters via Datalinks When selecting Parameters via Datalinks default the controller tags for the Datalinks use the drive parameter names to which they are assigned When selecting Datalinks the controller tags for the Datalinks have non descriptive UserDefinedData n names like those used in RSLogix 5000 software version 15 00 Data Format Parameters When the Connection field is set to Parameters via Datalinks Parameters is automatically selected When the Connection field is set to Datalinks you must select the number of Datalinks
175. from defaults and no DeviceLogix program consumes approximately 8 5 kilobytes of Logix memory per drive A PowerFlex 755 drive with four option modules approximately 50 changed parameters and a 32 block DeviceLogix program consumes approximately 25 kilobytes of Logix memory per drive The majority of Logix controllers have megabytes of memory available so this typically should not be an issue You can monitor Logix memory usage in RSLogix 5000 software From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Memory tab 74 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 Storing the DriveS and Peripherals Firmware in the Logix Controller Firmware Supervisor The Logix Firmware Supervisor function has been extended to provide firmware updates for the peripherals connected to the drive You must be online and in program mode with the controller to load store the firmware supervisor settings To configure the controller to check and refresh the correct firmware for the drive and peripherals perform the following steps 1 8 Verify that Exact Match keying is selected in the drives and peripherals properties dialog boxes a Click the General tab to view the drive s keying b Right click each peripheral on the Drive tab and choose Properties to view the peripheral s keying Verify that ControlFLASH firmware kits for each revision of firmware for each device that should b
176. from the drive 48 SI Secondary Err Number of CRC errors detected by the option module in the secondary channel Datalinks of the Serial Interface from the drive 49 HW Addr 1 Decimal value of each byte in the option module s Ethernet hardware address 50 HW Addr 2 255 255 255 255 255 255 51 HWAddr3 52 HWAddr 4 53 HWAddr5 54 HW Addr6 HW Addr 3 HW Addr 4 HW Addr 5 HW Addr 6 55 IP Addr Act 1 Value of each byte in the option module s present IP address A value of 0 appears if the option module 56 IP Addr Act 2 does not currently have an IP address 57 IP Addr Act 3 255 255 255 255 58 IP Addr Act 4 Ms IP Addr Act 2 IP Addr Act 3 IP Addr Act 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 119 Chapter 7 120 Troubleshooting Table 10 Adapter Mode Diagnostic Items Continued No Name Description 59 Subnet Act 1 Value of each byte in the option module s present subnet mask A value of 0 appears if the option module 60 Subnet Act 2 does not currently have a subnet mask 61 Subnet Act3 255 255 255 255 62 Subnet Act 4 Subnet Act 1 Subnet Act 2 Subnet Act 3 Subnet Act 4 63 Gateway Act 1 Value of each byte in the option module s present gateway address A value of 0 appears if the option 64 Gateway Act 2 module does not currently have a gateway address 65 Gateway Act 3 255 255 255 255 66 Gateway
177. g Ctrl Open The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a non zero value allowing control messages to be sent to the option module 43 Msg Ctrl Close The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a zero value disallowing control messages to be sent to the option module 44 Msg Ctrl Timeout The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object elapsed between accesses of those objects 45 Peer 10 Open The option module received the first Peer 1 0 message 46 Peer IO Timeout The option module has not received a Peer 1 0 message for longer than the Peer 1 0 Timeout 47 54 Reserved 55 BOOTP Response The option module received a response to its BOOTP request 56 E mail Failed The option module encountered an error attempting to send a requested e mail message 57 Reserved 58 Module Defaulted The option module has been set to defaults 59 FPGA Fact Load The option module has loaded the Factory configuration into its FPGA 60 FPGA User Load The option module has loaded the User configuration into its FPGA 61 Net Link 1 Up A network link was available for the option module on its ENET1 network port 62 Net Link 1 Down The network link was removed from the option module on its ENET1 network port 63 Net Link 2 Up A network link was available for the option module on its ENET2 network port 64 Net Link 2 Down The network link was removed from the op
178. gic Command Non zero values specify the index for the Datalink containing the drive s Logic Command For example if Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg has the value 3 specifying that Datalinks 14 16 are allocated for peer 1 0 and Parameter 30 Logic Src Cfg has the value 1 specifying that the first peer 1 0 Datalink contains the drive s Logic Command then Datalink 14 contains the drive s Logic Command NOTE The option module allows the peer input configuration parameters to be written while peer inputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer inputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the option module is power cycled or reset Ref Src Cfg Controls which of the peer to drive Datalinks contain the Reference for the drive The value zero specifies that none of the Datalinks contain the drive s Reference Non zero values specify the index for the Datalink containing the drive s Reference For example if Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg has the value 3 specifying that Datalinks 14 16 are allocated for peer 1 0 and Parameter 31 Ref Src Cfg has the value 1 specifying that the first peer 1 0 Datalink contains the drive s Reference then Datalink 14 contains the drive s Reference NOTE The option module allows the peer input configuration parameters to be written while peer inputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer inputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the opt
179. gic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Command Reference Command Stop My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 0 O C 2 Command Start My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 0 1 e Command Jog My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 0 2 Command Clear Faults My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 0 3 cC Command Forward Reverse PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 0 4 Command Forward Reverse PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 0 5 J E lt 3 6 87 Copy File Source Speed_Reference Dest My_PowerFlex_753_Drive O Data 1 Length 1 Example Datalink Data The Datalink data used in the example program is shown in Figure 22 Note that to describe the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned you may want to add descriptions to the automatically created generic controller tags or create a UDDT For this example the DL From Net tags were created to describe the drive parameters to which these Datalinks are assigned For example DL_From_Net_01_Stop_Mode_A indicates that option module Host Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 is assigned to drive parameter 370 Stop Mode A This same method applies to the DL_To_Net tags Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 97 Chapter 5 98 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Figure 22 ControlLogix Controller Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile DL From Net ex DL From Net DL From Met 01 Stop Mode 1
180. hat are required for your I O in the Input Size and Output Size boxes Since the option module always uses the 32 bit Logic Status 32 bit Feedback and a 32 bit word dedicated for memory allocation of the Generic Ethernet module profile at least three 32 bit words must be set for the Input Size The option module also uses the 32 bit Logic Command and 32 bit Reference requiring at least two 32 bit words for the Output Size If any or all of the drive s sixteen 32 bit Datalinks are used see Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy Adapter mode only on page 39 or Custom Peer I O Configuration on page 42 the Input and Output Size settings must be increased accordingly e Input Size Start with 3 words and add 1 word for each Datalink used to read data For example if 3 Datalinks Hos DL To Net xx parameters will be used to read drive or peripheral parameters add 3 words to the required 3 words fora total of 6 words You can use option module Device Parameter 04 DLs To Net Act to check the total number of Datalinks being used Word 0 is a pad word Word 1 is Logic Status Word 2 is Speed Feedback Word 3 is DL To Net 01 and so forth see Figure 13 Output Size Start with 2 words and add 1 word for each Datalink used to write data For example if 7 Datalinks Host DL From Net xx parameters will be used to write to drive or peripheral parameters add 7 words to the required 2 words for a total of 9 words Yo
181. he customized device Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 3 Get Component Name STRING 32 Name of the component 4 Get Component Firmware Revision STRUCT of USINT Major Revision USINT Minor Revision 8 Get Component Serial Number UDINT Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 9 Get International Component Name STRINGN Name ofthe component with support for Unicode Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix DPI Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x93 147 To access Host Config parameters use the Host DPI Parameter Object Class Code Ox9F Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Device Example Description Hex Dec 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Option Module 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 2 Drive Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 Port 2 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 Port3 16384 Class Attributes Option Module 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port4 16385 Option Module Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 Port 5 0x5800
182. hinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verify these devices drives network devices 3rd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation TIP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online find your controller in the Who Active dialog box From the Communications menu choose Who Active After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver with RSLinx software See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 53 and RSLinx online help for details 2 Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I O OK box in the upper left of the dialog box should be steady green 3 From the File menu choose Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears Navigate to a folder type a file name and click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer 4 Any Datalinks that were enabled in the controller and option module during I O configuration must also be configured in the drive Each D
183. i velData13 DINT To Net 11 My_PoweiFlex 753 DrivelData l4 DINT DL To Net 12 My PowerFlex 753 Drive l Data 15 DINT DL To Net 13 My_PowetFlex_753_Diive Data 16 DINT DL To Net 14 My_PoweiFlex 753 DrivelData 17 DINT DL To Net 15 My PowerFlex 753 Diive l Data 18 DINT DL To Net 16 Figure 19 ControlLogix Controller Output Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Nme 2 _ Desipin My PowerFlex 753 Diive O AB ETHERNET My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data DINT 18 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive O Data 0 DINT Logic Command My PowetFlex 753 Drive O Data 1 DINT Speed Reference My PowerFlex_753_Diive 0 Datal2 DINT DL From Net 01 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive O Data 3 DINT DL From Net 02 My PowetFlex 753 Drive O Data 4 DL From Net 03 My_PowerFlex 753 Drive 0 Datal5 DINT DL From Net 04 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O D ata 6 DINT DL From Net 05 E My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 7 DINT DL From Net 06 My PowerFlex 753 8 DINT DL From Net 07 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data S DINT DL From Net 08 My_PowerFlex_753 DriveO Dat 0 DINT DL From Net 09 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 1 DINT DL From Net 10 My PowetFlex 753 Drive O Data 12 DINT DL From Net 11 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 13 DINT DL From Net 12 My PowerFlex 753 Drive D Data 14 DINT DL From Net 13 753 Diive O Data 15 DINT DL From Net
184. iceNet Vendor s Association 190 related documentation 8 RSLogix 5000 software 193 wiring see cable Ethernet Z zero data configuring the option module for 46 definition 194 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At hetp www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone_en html or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Retur
185. ies Drives 1 Controller with 20 750 ENETR Option Modules ControlLogix controller shown with e Bridge Ed EtherNet IP e EE J networks gt L Computer with Ethernet Connection Ethernet RES Switch M The option module ENET1 and ENET2 network ports are used Figure 5 Connecting the Ethernet Cable in a DLR Topology Network PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 1 To other EtherNet IP with 20 750 ENETR Option Modules networks Controller ControlLogix controller Es shown with 1756 ENBT Bridge 1783 ETAP j 1 Computer with 1783 ETAP E Ethernet Connection The option module s ENET1 and ENET2 network ports are used 5 Depending on the network topology do one of the following e Star Network Topology Route the other end of the Ethernet cable from the network through the bottom of the drive and insert its cable plug into the option modules ENET 1 or ENET2 network port e Linear or DLR Network Topology Route the other end of the Ethernet cable from the network through the bottom of the first drive and insert its cable plug into the option module ENET 1 network port To connect to the second drive attach another Ethernet cable between the first drive s option module ENET2
186. iguring the option module for 46 definition 191 Host DPI Parameter object 177 host IDs 192 Host parameters list Adapter mode 146 149 Tap mode 152 1 0 about 87 configuring for ControlLogix controller 54 definition 191 understanding the 1 0 image 88 using with ControlLogix controller 92 Identity object 154 idle action 191 Idle Fit Action Host parameter 147 installation applying power to the option module 26 commissioning the option module 30 connecting to the network 23 preparing for 17 IP Addr Cfg 1 4 Device parameters Adapter mode 141 Tap mode 150 IP address definition classes 192 setting with BOOTP or DHCP server 32 setting with parameters 36 setting with switches 20 L LEDs see status indicators LINK 1 status indicator Tap mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 116 LINK 2 status indicator Tap mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 117 LINK 3 status indicator Tap mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 117 Logic Command Status bit definitions for PowerFlex 750 Series drives 187 definition 192 1 0 image for ControlLogix controller 88 using 89 Logic Src Cfg Device parameter 143 M MAC address see hardware address manual conventions 7 related documentation 8 website 8 Master Slave hierarchy configuring option module for 39 definition 192 messages see explicit messaging or I 0 MOD status indicator Adapter mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 114 Msg Fit Action Host parameter 148 Rockwell Auto
187. in temporary memory Valid only for DPI drives 11 Get Set DPI Link USINT 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance UINT ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of B00L 32 Descriptor see page 166 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 16 Get Parameter Processing Error USINT 0 No error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 18 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 19 Get International DPI Online Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online units 20 Get International DPI Online Struct of Read Full B00L 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default value UINT Next UINT Previous UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset USINT
188. ing controller tags are used Name Value Data Type Description _ _ My_PowerFlex_753_Drive C AB ETHERNET _ PowerFlex 753 Drivel AB ETHERNET My_PowerFlex_753_Drive 0 AB ETHERNET You can expand the Input and Output tags to reveal the input and output configuration The Input tag for this example requires nineteen 32 bit words of data Figure 18 The Output tag for this example program requires eighteen 32 bit words of data Figure 19 Figure 18 ControlLogix Controller Input Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name Data Type Desipin L PowerFlex 753 Drivel AB ETHERNET My PowerFlex 753 Diive Data DINT 19 My PowetFlex 753 Drive l Data Q 0 Pad Word My PoweiFlex 753 DrivelDate l DINT Logic Status My PowetFlex 753 Drive l Data 2 Speed Feedback My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l Data 3 DINT DL To Net 01 My_PowetFlex_753_Diive l Data4 DINT DL To Net 02 Powerlex 753 D vel Data 5 DINT DL To Net 03 PowerFlex 753 DrvelData 6 DINT DL To Net 04 My PowerFlex_753_Drive Datal7 DINT DL To Net 05 My_PowerFlex_753_Diive Data 8 DINT DL To Net 06 My_PoweiFlex 753 DrivelData S DINT DL To Net 07 PowerFlex 753 Di velData 10 DINT DL To Net 08 My_PowerFlex_753_Diive l Dataf11 DINT DL To Net 09 My PowerFlex_753_Drive Datal12 DINT DL ToNet 10 PowerFlex 753 D
189. ins volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the option module is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Regulatory Compliance Certification Spedfication UL UL508C cUL CAN CSA 22 2 No 14 2010 CE EN 61800 3 CTick EN 61800 3 NOTE This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800 3 Ina domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required 138 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Appendix B Option Module Parameters This appendix provides information about the option module parameters Topic Page Parametertypss o ha About Parameter Numbers 140 How Parameters Are Organized 140 Parameters for Adapter Mode Operation 140 Parameters for Tap Mode Operation 150 Parameter Types The option module has two types of parameters Device parameters are used to configure the option module to operate on the network Device parameters when viewed using DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive appear below the 20 750 ENETR listing in the treeview in a separate Device Parameters folder When viewed with the 20 HIM or 20 HIM C6S HIM these parameters appear in the DEV PARAM folder IMPORTANT Some Device parameters are not applicable when operating the option module in Adapter mode while others are
190. iod Sets the minimum time that the option module will wait when transmitting data to a peer NOTE The option module allows the peer output configuration parameters to be written while peer outputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer outputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the option module is power cycled or reset To Peer Skip Sets the maximum time that the option module will wait when transmitting data to a peer The value of Device Parameter 41 To Peer Period is multiplied by the value of this parameter to set the time NOTE The option module allows the peer output configuration parameters to be written while peer outputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer outputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the option module is power cycled or reset To Peer Enable Controls whether peer 1 0 output is operating A value of 0 Off or 1 Reserved turns off peer 1 0 output A value of 2 Custom enables peer 1 0 output using the Datalink count and settings provided by the user Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Option Module Parameters Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Minimum Maximum Type Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Appendix B 0 0
191. ion module is power cycled or reset Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Option Module Parameters Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Minimum Maximum Type Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Appendix B 0 0 16 Read Write No 0 16 Read Only 0 0 16 Read Write No 0 0 16 Read Write No 143 Appendix 144 Option Module Parameters Parameter No 32 33 34 35 37 38 Name and Description Fr Peer Timeout Sets the timeout for a peer 1 0 connection If the time is reached without the option module receiving consuming a message the option module will respond with the action specified in Host Parameter 35 Peer Fit Action In an option module receiving consuming peer 1 0 the value of this parameter must be greater than the product of the value of Device Parameter 41 To Peer Period in the option module transmitting producing peer 1 0 multiplied by the value of Device Parameter 42 To Peer Skip in the option module transmitting producing peer 1 0 NOTE The option module allows the peer input configuration parameters to be written while peer inputs are running However the changes will not take effect until peer inputs are disabled and then re enabled or until the option module is power cycled or reset Fr Peer Addr 1 Fr Pe
192. it REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 333Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 444 Hz 577 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz See DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Table 9 Example Controller Tags to Write Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Scattered Write Message Data Type XIC Execute_Scattered_Write_Message BOOL MSG Scattered_Write_Message MESSAGE Figure 32 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Execute_Scattered_Write_Message MSG JE Message Scattered Write Message I CDN P IMPORTANT Ifthe explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A see page 104 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Chapter 6 ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Write Mul
193. kwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Preface This manual provides information about the 20 750 ENETR Dual port EtherNet IP Option Module for network communication and how to use the module with PowerFlex 750 Series drives The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Parameter names are shown in the format Device Parameter xx or Host Parameter xx The xx represents the parameter number The represents the parameter name for example Device Parameter 01 Operating Mode The firmware revision number FRN is displayed as FRN X xxx where X is the major revision number and xxx is the minor revision number For the screen captures in this manual the following software was used RSLinx Classic software version 2 52 RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 and for Automatic Device Configuration information version 20 00 Different versions of the software may differ in appearance and procedures Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide with over 75 sales and support offices over 500 authorized distributors and over 250 authorized systems integrators located through the United States alone In addition Rockwell Automation representatives are in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the following e Sales and order support e Product technical training e Warranty suppor
194. l is an open producer consumer communication network based on the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 TCP IP UDP IP and CIP Designed for industrial communication both I O and explicit messages can be transmitted over the network Each device is assigned a unique IP address and transmits data on the network The number of devices that an EtherNet IP network can support depends on the class of IP address For example a network with a Class C IP address can have 254 nodes General information about EtherNet IP and the EtherNet IP specification are maintained by the Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association ODVA ODVA is online at http www odva org Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Explicit Messaging Fault Action Fault Configuration Gateway Hardware Address HIM Human Interface Module Hold Last Idle Action I O Data Glossary Explicit messages are used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates They are typically used to configure monitor and diagnose devices over the network A fault action determines how the option module and connected drive act when a communication fault for example a cable is disconnected occurs or when the controller is switched out of run mode The former uses a communication fault action and the latter uses an idle fault action When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the option module and PowerFlex drive can resp
195. l Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 183 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 2 Get Configuration Capability UDINT Bit Value 0 False 1 True 0 Supports BOOTP 1 DNS Client able to resolve host names by query to DNS server 2 DHCP Client able to obtain network configuration through DHCP 3 DHCP DNS Update able to send its host name in the DHCP request 4 Configuration Settable able to set the network configuration via TCP IP object 5 Hardware Configurable able to set the network configuration via the Node Address switches 6 Configuration change requires reset 7 Address Conflict Detection ACD capable 8 31 Reserved 3 Set Configuration Control UDINT Bit Value 0 3 Startup configuration 0 Use configuration saved in NVS 1 Obtain configuration via BOOTP 2 Obtain configuration via DHCP 3 15 Reserved 4 DNS Enabled resolves host names by query to DNS server 5 31 Reserved 4 Get Physical Link Object STRUCT of UINT Path size Padded EPATH Path 5 Get Interface Configuration STRUCT of UDINT Option module IP address UDINT Option module subnet mask UDINT Option module gateway address UDINT Primary name server UDINT Secondary name server STRING Default domain name 6 Get Host Name STRING Host name when using DHCP 10 Set Select ACD BOOL Activates the use of ACD
196. l will be automatically upgraded if necessary prior to any ADC operation for that port IMPORTANT Logix owns the configuration of the drive ADC will be triggered any time the Logix controller detects a configuration signature mismatch when establishing an EtherNet IP network 1 0 connection The use of other configuration tools such as a HIM DriveExplorer software or DriveTools SP software should be minimized and restricted to monitor only operation Any configuration changes made by these tools will cause a configuration signature mismatch the next time the Logix controller connects to the device and ADC will write over any changes made by the other tools Consider using the Write Mask function drive Parameter 888 Write Mask Cfg to prevent tools connected to ports other than the Embedded EtherNet IP port in a PowerFlex 755 drive from writing to the drive Any drive configuration changes should be made with the RSLogix 5000 Add on Profile AOP Version 4 01 Drive Add on Profiles AOPs RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 ships with version 4 01 Drive Add on Profiles AOPs Note the following ADC operating status when using version 4 01 Drive AOPs e When adding new drive ADC is enabled by default for any drive that supports ADC such as PowerFlex 753 drives with firmware 7 001 or later or PowerFlex 755 drives with firmware 4 001 or later e When converting RSLogix 5000 projects version 16 00 19 00 to version 20
197. le Adapter mode only 54 The Configure Drivers dialog box reappears with the new driver in the Configured Drivers list Configure Drivers Available Driver Types Cose EtherNet IP Driver 7 Add New Help Configured Drivers Name and Description Status AB_ETHIP 1 Ethernet RUNNING Running 9 Click Close to close the Configure Drivers dialog box 10 Keep RSLinx software running and verify that your computer recognizes the drive a From the Communications menu choose RSWho b In the menu tree click next to the Ethernet driver Note that two other RSLinx drivers Ethernet devices or Remote Devices via Linx Gateway may be used Use one of these drivers if the EtherNet IP Driver cannot see your drive The option module has embedded EDS files for PowerFlex 750 Series drives This eliminates the need to download an EDS file from the Rockwell Automation website Instead RSLinx software is used to upload the EDS file from the option module To do this right click the EtherNet IP drive that is shown as a yellow question mark or Unrecognized Device in the RSWho dialog box and choose Upload EDS file from device as shown below Uploading the EDS file also uploads the icon files for the device The question mark will change to a drive in Adapter mode or an in Tap mode 10 91 96 101 Unrecognized Device 755 Remove Driver Diagnostics Configure Driver
198. le into drive Port 4 5 or 6 make sure to tighten the module screws to the pod mounting bracket to properly ground the module to the drive Torque both screws to 0 45 0 67 Nem 4 0 6 0 Ib in When Operating in Tap Mode only with PowerFlex 755 drives Install the option module in the PowerFlex 755 drive control pod in only Port 4 or 5 When operating in Tap mode drive Port 6 cannot be used For more installation details see the Network Communication Option Card Installation Instructions publication 750CO M INO02 provided with the option module IMPORTANT After inserting the option module into PowerFlex 755 drive Port 4 or 5 only make sure to tighten the module screws to the control pod bracket to properly ground the module to the drive Torque both screws to 0 45 0 67 Nem 4 0 6 0 Ib in Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Installing the Option Module Chapter 2 Con necting the Option The option module is connected to the network differently depending on the Module to the Network mode in which the option module is operated When Operating in Adapter Mode voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before connecting the option module to the network ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the drive cover and lift up the drive HIM bezel
199. lid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved 2 Get International Alarm Text STRINGN Text describing the alarm with support for Unicode 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 DPI Diagnostic Object EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x99 153 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of diagnostic items in the device The total number of diagnostic items can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Device Example Description Hex Dec 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Option Module 1 Drive Diagnostic Item 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 2 Drive Diagnostic Item 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 Port2 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 Port3 16384 Class Attributes Option Module 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port 4 16385 Option Module Diagnostic Item 1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 Port7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 Ox6C00
200. llen Bradley products and network communication option modules It can be run on computers running various Microsoft Windows operating systems DriveExplorer software version 6 xx or later can be used to configure this option module and PowerFlex drive Information about DriveExplorer software and a free lite version can be accessed at http www ab com drives driveexplorer software suite designed for running on various Microsoft Windows operating systems This software suite provides a family of tools including DriveExecutive software that you can use to program monitor control troubleshoot and maintain Allen Bradley products DriveTools SP software can be used with PowerFlex drives Information about DriveTools SP software can be accessed at http www ab com drives drivetools Duplex describes the mode of communication Fudl duplex communication lets a device exchange data in both directions at the same time Half duplex communication lets a device exchange data only in one direction at a time The duplex used by the option module depends on the type of duplex that other network devices such as switches support Simple text files that are used by network configuration tools to describe products so that you can easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a product device type and revision EDS files for many Allen Bradley products can be found at http www ab com networks eds EtherNet IP Industrial Protoco
201. ller 20 v O Redundancy Enabled v20_Example_using 20750ENETR_foe_PF753 Example showing how to control PowerFlex 753 dive with 20 750 ENETR Dualpost EtherNet IP option using RSLoge 5000 v20 1756 47 7 54 Control ogix Chassis 0 CRSLog 5000V Projects No Protection a Choose the appropriate choices for the fields in the dialog box to match your application b Click OK The RSLogix 5000 dialog box reappears with the treeview in the left pane 3 In the treeview right click che I O Configuration folder and choose New Module Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 55 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 The Select Module dialog box appears 4 Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules Select Module Type Hide Fites 2 Module Type Category Fes Module Type Vendor Fiters 124 of 124 Module Types Found Add to Favorites Close on Creste Creste Close Help 5 In the list select the EtherNet IP bridge used by your controller In this example we use a 1756 EN2TR EtherNet IP Bridge Series A so the 1756 EN2TR A option is selected 6 Click OK 7 In the Select Major Revision pop up dialog box select the major revision of its firmware 8 Click OK The bridge s New Module dialog box appears New Module Genea Connection Time Sync Module Info Intemet Protocol Configuration
202. lue of the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 007 Output Current in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Table 6 Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Read Message BOOL MSG Single Read Message MESSAGE Figure 24 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Read_Message MSG JE Message Message Control Single_Read_Message HC DN gt HCER Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 101 Chapter6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Figure 25 Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Dialog Boxes Message Configuration Single_Read_Message Configuration Communication Name 5 ingle_Read_Message Message Configuration Single_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My PowerFlex 755 Drive Browse Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Get Attribute Single Source Element Type zoe X Source Length o Bytes pees Hex Class 93 Destination Output_Current Instance 7 Amibue New Tag Q Enable Enable Waiting Q Stat Done Done Length 0 Eror Code Extended
203. m networks bootp html See the Readme file and online Help for directions and more information TIP If you prefer to configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address using option module parameters set Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel to 1 Parameters Then use the appropriate option module parameters For details see Using Option Module Parameters on page 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 1 Depending on the type of server BOOTP or DHCP being used set Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel to either 2 BOOTP or 3 DHCP respectively Value Setting 1 Parameters 2 BOOTP 3 DHCP default 2 Note the option module s hardware Ethernet Address MAC which will be used in step 7 There are two ways to do this Locate the option module s hardware Ethernet Address MAC on the module s product data nameplate label Figure 8 located on the backside of the circuit board Figure 8 Option Module Hardware Address Label Location B o Backside of circuit board i Ethernet Address MAC label location MC 9 o Use the HIM to scroll to the drive Port in which the option module is installed and access the option module s DIAGNOSTIC folder screen Then scroll to Diagnostic Items 49 54 HW Addr 1 6 to view the option module s hardware Ethe
204. m Peer 1 0 Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Fr Peer Addr 1 Fr Peer Addr 2 Fr Peer Addr 3 Fr Peer Addr 4 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 10 11 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 Ifa Logic Command is being sent use Device Parameter 30 Logic Src Cfg to set the number of the Datalink that contains the Logic Command within the range defined by Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg For example if Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg is set to receive five Datalinks Datalinks 12 through 16 and the first of those five Datalinks Datalink 12 contains the Logic Command set Device Parameter 30 Logic Src Cfg to a value of 1 Otherwise set Parameter 30 to a value of 0 For Logic Command bit definitions see Appendix D or the drive documentation Ifa Reference is being sent use Device Parameter 31 Ref Src Cfg to set the number of the Datalink that contains the Reference within the range defined by Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg For example if Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg is set to receive five Datalinks Datalinks 12 through 16 and the second of those five Datalinks Datalink 13 contains the Reference set Device Parameter 31 Ref Src Cfg to a value of 2 Otherwise set Parameter 31 to a value of 0 In each PowerFlex 750 Series slave drive set drive parameter 308 Direction Mode to 0 Unipolar
205. mation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 NET Astatus indicator Adapter mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 115 Net Addr Sel Device parameter Adapter mode 140 Tap mode 150 Net Addr Src Device parameter Adapter mode 140 Tap mode 150 NET B status indicator Adapter mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 115 Net Rate Act 1 Device parameter Adapter mode 142 Tap mode 151 Net Rate Act 2 Device parameter Adapter mode 142 Tap mode 152 Net Rate Act 3 Device parameter 152 Net Rate Cfg 1 Device parameter Adapter mode 141 Tap mode 151 Net Rate Cfg 2 Device parameter Adapter mode 142 Tap mode 151 Net Rate Cfg 3 Device parameter 152 network cable 23 24 network IDs 192 Nonvolatile Storage NVS definition 193 in drive 90 in option module 31 0 objects list of 153 186 ODVA EtherNet IP specification 190 OK status indicator Tap mode locating 113 troubleshooting with 116 Operating Mode Device parameter Adapter mode 140 Tap mode 150 Index option module applying power 26 commissioning 30 compatible products 13 components 9 configuration tools 31 connecting to the drive 22 to the network 23 definition 193 Device parameters list Adapter mode 140 145 Tap mode 150 152 features 10 firmware updating 52 hardware address 119 121 Host parameters list Adapter mode 146 149 Tap mode 152 installation 17 30 IP address setting with BOOTP or DHCP server 32 setting with parameters 36 setting with switches 20 resetting
206. message example we use the data structure in Figure 34 in the source tag Scattered_Write_Request to write new values to these 32 bit REAL floating point parameters PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 577 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz See DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Figure 34 shows the parameter values which in this example have been converted using a UDDT to correctly write their values COP Copy instructions could have been used for this purpose instead of a UDDT If the parameters being written to are 32 bit integers do not COP the data toa REAL tag Figure 34 Example Scattered Write Request Converted Data Name x Value Data Type Description Scattered_Write_Request Scattered Writ Scattered Write RequestAccel Time 2 Par No 536 DINT Scattered Write Request Accel Time 2 Par Value 11 1 REAL Scattered Write Request Decel Time 2 Par No Scattered Wiite Request Decel Time 2 Par Value Scaltered Write Request Preset Speed 5 Par No 5 DINT Scaltered Write Request Preset Speed 5 Par Value 33 3 REAL Scattered Write Request Preset_Speed_6 Par 576 DINT Scattered Write Request Preset Speed 6 Par Value 44 4 REAL 4 Scattered Wiite
207. meters 01 DL From Net 01 through 16 DL From Net 16 control which parameters in the drive option module or any other connected peripheral receive the values from the network The PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM DriveExplorer software or DriveExecutive software can be used to select the drive or peripheral by port number and the parameter by name Asan alternate method the parameter value can be set manually by number using this formula From Net Parameter Value 10000 port number Destination Parameter Number For example suppose you want to use Host Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 to write to Parameter 03 of an optional encoder module plugged into drive Port 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 39 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Using the formula the value for Host Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 would be 10000 5 3 50003 Follow these steps to enable Datalinks to write data 1 Set the values of only the required number of contiguous controller to drive Datalinks needed to write data to the drive and that are to be included in the network I O connection 2 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 3 Since the Logic Command and Reference is always used in the option module configure the parameters in the drive to accept the Logic Command and Reference from the option module When using the controller for speed reference via the option
208. module is unable to communicate with the designated peer By default this parameter faults the drive You may configure this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a controller in idle state Msg Fit Action Sets the action that the option module and drive will take if the option module detects that explicit messaging only when used for drive control via the PCCC CIP Assembly or CIP Register objects has been disrupted When explicit messaging is re established data is automatically received sent over the network again A Default Values Type Reset Required 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Host Parameter 36 Msg Fit Action lets you determine the action of the option module and connected drive if explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You may configure this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system resp
209. module node address switches set the IP address now and proceed with step 4 When using a DHCP server BOOTP server or option module parameters to set the IP address first perform step 3b and all of step 4 Then proceed with step 5 b Verify that the PowerFlex drive is not powered Chapter 2 Installing the Option Module Install the option module a Insert the option module in only PowerFlex 755 drive Port 4 or 5 Use the captive crews to secure and ground the option module to the drive b Connect the option module to the network by using an Ethernet cable Network Communication Option Card Installation Instructions publication 750COM IN002 and Chapter 2 Installing the Option Module Apply power to the option module a The option module receives power from the drive Verify that the option module is installed correctly and then apply power to the drive The status indicators should be green If they flash red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting b Configure and verify key drive parameters Chapter 2 Installing the Option Module Configure the option module for your application Set option module parameters for the following functions as required by your application IP address subnet mask and gateway address only when not using option module node address switches Datarate Web enable and features Chapter 3 Configuring the Option Module Set or verify the
210. munication module configurations are To match revision and upload the configuration of an online drive click Match Drive There are three Electronic Keying choices available in the Module Definition dialog box in the Drive but only two are recommended with ADC Electronic Keying Recommendation Selection Exact Match This selection should only be used if Your system design specification requires that a replacement drive peripheral be identical down to the Minor revision of firmware x xxx You will be implementing Firmware Supervisor upgrade support in addition to ADC ControlFLASH firmware kits for the revision of firmware used for each drive peripheral must be installed on the computer running RSLogix 5000 software Upgrade files can be downloaded from http www ab com support abdrives webupdate Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the O Chapter 4 Electronic Keying Recommendation Selection Compatible Module This selection is the typical ADC selection when Firmware Supervisor is not used A replacement drive including peripherals will need to have the same or higher firmware revision as the original Since drives with newer firmware are required to be compatible with older firmware this allows ADC to work without compatibility concerns Note that if a Series change accompanies a Major firmware change the replacement drive may or may not be compatible wi
211. n Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 750COM UM008A EN P July 2012 Copyright 2
212. n a COP Copy instruction or UDDT is needed for REAL parameters speed Reference and speed Feedback only to copy the REAL data into a DINT word To determine whether a parameter is a 32 bit integer DINT or a REAL data type see the Data Type column in the chapter containing parameters in the PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drives Programming Manual publication 750 PM001 The example ladder logic programs in the sections of this chapter are intended for and operate PowerFlex 750 Series drives Functions of the Example Programs The example programs enable you to do the following Receive Logic Status information from the drive e Senda Logic Command to control the drive for example start stop e Send a Reference to the drive and receive Feedback from the drive e Send receive Datalink data to from the drive Logic Command Status Words These examples use the Logic Command word and Logic Status word for PowerFlex 750 Series drives See Appendix D Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 750 Series Drives to view details Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 91 Chapter5 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only ControlLogix Controller This section includes information when using an RSLogix 5000 Drive Add on Example Profile or a Generic Profile Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Drive Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later Since the drive Add on Profile automatically created descriptive controlle
213. n and close the dialog box The drives New Module dialog box reappears Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 61 Chapter 4 62 Configuring the 1 0 8 Click the Connection tab New Module Generi Correction Module info Port Configuration Dave Requested Packet interval RFE 200 5 ms 10 5120 Modde C Maior Faut On Controller If Connection Fals While in Run Mode E Use Uricait Correction over Ether AP 9 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 2 0 milliseconds or greater default is 20 0 milliseconds This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the option module To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices The Inhibit Module box when checked inhibits the module from communicating with the RSLogix 5000 project When the Major Fault box is checked a major controller fault will occur when the module s connection fails while the controller is in the Run Mode For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault On boxes unchecked Unicast support has been added to RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later Unicast is recommended whenever possible For the benefits of unicast operation see Preparing for an Installation on page 17 10 Click the Port Configuration tab E New Module General Connection Module I
214. n this example now appears under the bridge EtherNet IP Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you double click the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 11 and Figure 12 Note that all tag names are defined and Datalinks include the assigned drive parameter name After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic Figure 11 Controller Input Tags My PowerFlex 753 Drive My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l DriveStatus 0000 x My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus Ready 5 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Diivel DrveStalus Active 2 BODL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus_CommandDir c BOOL My PonetFlex 753 Diive l DriveStatus ActualDir c BOOL 753 Drivel DriveStatus Accelerating c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus Decelerating BOOL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l DiiveStatus Alarm 2 BOOL My PowetFlex 753 Drive DriveStatus_Fauked 2 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive DriveStatus AlSpeed 2 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drivel DriveStatus Manual c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drivel DriveStatus_ SpdRefBi0 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus SpdRiefBi 2 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStalus SpdRefBi2 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DiiveStatus SpdRelBi3 2 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 DiiveDriveSta
215. network data rate at which the option module communicates on its ENET1 network port Updates Device Parameter 20 Net Rate Act 1 after a reset Net Rate Act 1 Displays the actual speed and duplex network data rate for the option module s ENET1 network port Net Rate Cfg 2 Sets the speed and duplex network data rate at which the option module communicates on its ENET2 network port Updates Device Parameter 22 Net Rate Act 2 after a reset Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Option Module Parameters Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Values Type Default Values Type Reset Required Appendix B Read Write Yes c 0 255 Read Write Yes 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Disabled Read Write Yes 0 No Link 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Dup IP Addr Read Only 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Disabled Read Write Yes 151 Appendix 152 Option Module Parameters Parameter No 22 23 24 25 26 Name and Description Net Rate Act 2 Di
216. network port and the second drives option module ENET network port To connect additional drives repeat these daisy chain connections in the same way Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Installing the Option Module Chapter 2 When Operating in Tap Mode only PowerFlex 755 drives voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high verify power has been discharged before connecting the option module to the network 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the drive cover and lift up the drive HIM bezel to its open position to access the drive control pod 3 Use static control precautions iN Connect the short Ethernet cable provided with the option module between the option module s ENET3 DEVICE port and the Ethernet port on the PowerFlex 755 drive s embedded EtherNet IP adapter see Figure 6 ENET1 and ENET2 ports are used for linear or DLR network topology as shown in Figure 4 or Figure 5 Figure 6 Connecting the Short Ethernet Cable for Tap Mode of Operation O 9 7 o
217. nfo Port Configuration Dive Pate e Subnet Mask Gateway Address Enable Boot O Manually configure IP settings O Obtain IP settings automaticaly using BOOTP Obtain IP settings automatically using DHCP 11 In the Port Configuration tab dialog box edit the following information Box Setting IP Address The IP address of the option module that was already set in the General tab This field is not configurable grayed out Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask configuration setting of the network This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network for example 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address The Gateway Address configuration setting of the network This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network for example 10 91 100 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 Box Setting Enable BootP When this box is checked BOOTP is enabled in the option module and will ignore the IP address set in the General tab When unchecked the controller uses the set IP address This is another method to enable disable BOOTP in the option module For this example leave this box unchecked 12 Click Set to save the Port Configuration information which sets the corresponding offline Subnet Cfg x and Gateway Cfg x parameters in the option module 13 Click OK on the New Module dialog box The new node PowerFlex 753 Drive i
218. nificant N45 3 Reference most significant Feedback most significant N54 DL From Net 01 least significant DL To Net 01 least significant N45 5 DL From Net 01 most significant DL To Net 01 most significant N45 6 DL From Net 02 least significant DL To Net 02 least significant N57 DL From Net 02 most significant DL To Net 02 most significant N45 8 DL From Net 03 least significant DL To Net 03 least significant N45 9 DL From Net 03 most significant DL To Net 03 most significant N45 10 DL From Net 04 least significant DL To Net 04 least significant N45 11 DL From Net 04 most significant DL To Net 04 most significant N45 12 DL From Net 05 least significant DL To Net 05 least significant N45 13 DL From Net 05 most significant DL To Net 05 most significant N45 14 DL From Net 06 least significant DL To Net 06 least significant N45 15 DL From Net 06 most significant DL To Net 06 most significant N45 16 DL From Net 07 least significant DL To Net 07 least significant N45 17 DL From Net 07 most significant DL To Net 07 most significant N45 18 DL From Net 08 least significant DL To Net 08 least significant N45 19 DL From Net 08 most significant DL To Net 08 most significant N45 20 DL From Net 09 least significant DL To Net 09 least significant N45 21 DL From Net 09 most significant DL To Net 09 most significant N45 22 DL From Net 10 least significant DL To Net 10 least significant N45 23
219. nnection with a controller When a controller has an I O connection to the drive the drive does not allow a reset to defaults configuration download or anything else that Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Example Ladder Logic Program Information Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Chapter 5 could change the makeup of the I O connection in a running system The I O connection with the controller must first be disabled to allow changes to the respective Datalinks Depending on the controller being used the I O connection can be disabled by doing the following e Inhibiting the module in RSLogix 5000 software e Putting the controller in Program mode e Placing the scanner in idle mode e Disconnecting the drive from the network DeviceLogix Datalinks are also locked while the DeviceLogix program is running The DeviceLogix program must first be disabled to allow changes to the Datalinks Set DeviceLogix parameter 53 DLX Operation to DisableLogic to disable the logic the parameter value will then change to LogicDisabld TIP When using the drive Add on Profile the controller tags for Reference and Feedback to Datalinks are automatically and properly formatted If a Generic Profile is used a COP Copy instruction or a UDDT is needed for REAL parameters speed Reference and speed Feedback only to copy the DINT data into a REAL word for input data conversion For output data conversio
220. nt devices including the drive option module and other devices connected to the drive such as a HIM Port x folders Click a respective Port folder to expand and view its device s various links which take you to related information pages For Port 0 PowerFlex 750 Series drive example information pages see Figure 44 Figure 45 and Figure 46 Online user manuals link Click this link to view Rockwell Automation s web page with documentation for drives and other devices Software tools Web site link Click this link to view Allen Bradley s web page with information about software tools such as DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive Launch my DriveExplorer software link Click this link to launch the DriveExplorer software already installed on your computer Launch my DriveExecutive software link Click this link to launch the DriveExecutive software already installed on your computer E mail technical support link Click this link to view a new e mail message dialog box to send a message to the Allen Bradley Technical Support Team Information on Adapter Mode Home Page The option module Adapter mode Home Page displays the following information for the host PowerFlex 750 Series drive and its EtherNet IP option module Device Adapter EtherNet IP ENETR Option Module Information Revision IP Address Ethernet Address MAC Serial Number Status 1 0 Connection Status Ethernet Link
221. occurred Use drive parameter 950 Minor Flt Yellow Alternately Config to enable If not enabled acts like a major fault When running the drive continues to run System is brought to a stop under System control The fault must be cleared to continue Yellow Flashing When running a type 1 alarm exists Green Alternately Green Red Flashing Drive is updating Alternately Option Module Status Indicators Tap Mode 0 Green Flashing Normal operation The option module is establishing communication with the drive It will turn steady green or red Steady Normal operation The option module has established communication with the drive LINK Unlit Off The option module is not properly connected to the network LINK 2 Green Flashing Normal operation There is a 100 Mbps network link with activity LINK 3 Steady Normal operation There is a 100 Mbps network link no activity Yellow Flashing Normal operation There is a 10 Mbps network link with activity Steady Normal operation There is a 10 Mbps network link no activity After verifying correct operation swing down the drive HIM bezel to its closed position and install the drive cover For more details on status indicator operation see page 114 or page 116 28 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Installing the Option Module Chapter 2 Configuring and Verifying Key Drive Parameters The Power
222. ockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 41 Chapter 3 42 Configuring the Option Module Set Device Parameters 41 To Peer Period and 42 To Peer Skip as desired for your application Parameter 41 controls how frequently the option module will transmit data when it is changing Parameter 42 controls how frequently the option module will transmit data when it is not changing Set Host Parameter 31 DL To Net 15 to point to the drive parameter Drive Logic Rslt which is parameter 879 for PowerFlex 753 drives and PowerFlex 755 drives Set Host Parameter 32 DL To Net 16 to point to the drive parameter Drive Ref Rslt which is parameter 883 for PowerFlex 753 drives and PowerFlex 755 drives Set Device Parameter 39 DLs To Peer Cfg to value of 2 Set Device Parameter 43 To Peer Enable to a value of 2 Custom Value Setting 0 Off Default 1 Reserved 2 Custom Follow these steps to set up the slave receiver side of simple peer I O 1 Set Device Parameter 32 Fr Peer Timeout to a suitable timeout value for your application This value should be greater than the product of Device Parameter 41 To Peer Period and Device Parameter 42 To Peer Skip in the transmitting drive Set Device Parameters 33 Fr Peer Addr 1 through 36 Fr Peer Addr 4 to the IP address of the drive transmitting peer I O In each
223. odule and consumed as input by the controller The I O image will vary based on the following How many of the drive s 32 bit Datalinks Host DL From Net 01 16 and Host DL To Net 01 16 are used ControlLogix CompactLogix Controllers only The drive profile used in RSLogix 5000 software drive Add on Profile in version 16 00 or later or Generic Profile in all versions ControlLogix Controller Image Since the drive Add on Profile in RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later provides descriptive controller tags the I O image tag size and location is automatically configured based on the drive being used When using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile however controller tags are not descriptive or defined Table 3 shows the I O image when using all of the 32 bit Datalinks Table 3 ControlLogix Controller 1 0 Image for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 32 bit Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks DINT Output O Input 1 0 Using DINT Drive Add on Profile DINT Generic Profile 0 LogicCommand 0 loicsaus 0 1 Reference 1 Feedback 1 Logic Status 2 DL From Net 01 2 DL To Net 01 2 Feedback 3 DL From Net 02 3 DL To Net 02 3 DL Net 01 4 DL From Net 03 4 DL To Net 03 4 DL To Net 02 5 DL From Net 04 5 DL Net 04 5 DL To Net 03 6 DL From Net 05 6 D
224. odule is operating normally but is not transferring 1 0 data to a controller e Place the scanner in RUN mode Program the controller to recognize and transmit 1 0 to the option module Configure the option module for the program the controller Normal behavior if no 1 0 is being transferred Steady Green 114 The option module is operating normally and is transferring 1 0 data to a controller No action required Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 NET A Status Indicator Adapter Mode This red green bicolor LED indicates the status for the network connection as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Actions off The option module is not powered Securely connect and ground the option module to the drive by fully The option module is not properly connected to the network inserting it into the drive port and tightening its two captive screws to the num recommended torque The option module has not acquired its network configuration IP address subnet mask gateway address from the BOOTP DHCP Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector server Seta unique IP address with the option module rotary switches option module parameters or a BOOTP or DHCP server Apply power to the drive Flashing Red The 1 0 connection has timed out Place the controller in RUN mode or apply power to the peer devic
225. oller fault will occur when the module s connection fails while the controller is in the Run Mode For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault On boxes unchecked Unicast support has been added to RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later Unicast is recommended whenever possible For the benefits of unicast operation see Preparing for an Installation on page 17 10 Click OK The new node PowerFlex 753 Drive in this example now appears under the bridge My EtherNet IP Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you double click the Input and Output Controller Tags Figure 13 and Figure 14 you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 83 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 Figure 13 Input Image Controller Tags L Nme Data Type Description _ My PowerFlex 753 Drive AB ETHERNET Power les 753 Drive l Data JDINT 1S PowerFlex_753_Drive l Data 0 DINT Pad Word PowerFlex 753 D ivel Data DINT Logic Status My PowetFlex 753 Diive l Data 2 DINT Speed Feedback My PowerFlex 753 DivelData 3 DINT DL To Net 01 Powerlex 753 Di velData 4 DINT DL To Net 02 P
226. ommend that you always use Rockwell Automation Cat5e shielded Ethernet cable User defined fault actions to determine how the option module and its connected host drive respond to the following I O messaging communication disruptions Comm Fit Action Controllers in Idle mode Idle Flt Action Peer device communication disruptions Peer Flt Action Explicit messaging disruptions for drive control via PCCC the CIP Register Object or the CIP Assembly object Msg Flt Action Accessing parameters by their name or their number Web pages viewed by using a web browser that show information about the option module its host drive and DPI devices connected to the drive Depending on its selected operating mode Adapter or Tap the option module provides a unique set of web pages with different information Configured e mail messaging Adapter mode only to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the option module takes a communication or idle fault action Access to any PowerFlex drive and its connected peripherals on the network to which the option module is connected Theoption module can be operated in Adapter mode default or Tap mode The Operating Mode Jumper J item 3 in Figure 1 on page 19 is used to select the operating mode If the jumper is missing the option module operates in the Adapter mode Adapter Mode default In the Adapter mode the
227. on See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting E 2 Node Address Sets the network node address of the ps Switches option module when not using NE A BOOTP or DHCP server Option module parameters See Setting the Node Address on page 20 Operating Mode Selects the mode in which the option Jumper J4 module operates See Setting the Operating Mode on page 19 ENET1 Network RJ 45 connector for the Ethernet network Port cable The connector is CAT 5 compliant to ensure reliable data transfer on ENET2 Network 100Base TX Ethernet connections Either Port port may be used in Adapter mode ENET3 DEVICE RJ 45 connector to connect the short Port PowerFlex Ethernet cable provided with the option 755 only module to the Ethernet port on the PowerFlex 755 drive embedded EtherNet IP adapter This is intended for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet IP network data transfer Top View Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Chapter1 Getting Started Features The features of the option module include the following e Adapter or Tap mode of operation that is selected by using the Operating Mode Jumper J4 In Adapter mode default the option module operates as a network communication adapter supporting star linear or device level ring DLR network topologies In Tap mode only intended for use with PowerFlex 755 drives the option module uses ENET3 DEVICE port as a connection point to tr
228. ond with a user defined fault configuration The user sets the data that is sent to the drive using specific fault configuration parameters in the option module When a fault action parameter is set to use the fault configuration data and a fault occurs the data from these parameters is sent as the Logic Command Reference and or Datalinks A device on a network that connects an individual network to a system of networks When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network a gateway transfers the data between the two networks You need to configure the address for the gateway device in the option module if you want the option module to communicate with devices that are not on its network Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address sometimes called a MAC address that is 48 bits The address appears as six digits separated by colons for example xx xx xx xx xx xx Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 0x00 and OxFF This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed It is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP DHCP server A device that can be used to configure and control a drive The PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM can be used to configure PowerFlex 750 Series drives and their connected peripherals When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the option module and PowerFlex drive can respond by holding last Hold last results in the drive receiving the
229. onds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Fit Cfg Logic Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true Host Parameter 33 Comm Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and 1 0 communication is disrupted Host Parameter 34 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle Host Parameter 35 Peer Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and peer 1 0 communication is disrupted Host Parameter 36 Msg Flt Action is set to 4 Send Flt Cfg and explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted Important The bit definitions in the Logic Command word for PowerFlex 750 Series drives are shown in Appendix D Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 11111111 1111 1111 11111111 1111 1111 Read Write No Parameter No 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Name and Description FIt Cfg Ref Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any ofthe following is true Host Parameter 33 Comm Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and 1 0 communication is disrupted Host Parameter 34 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle Host Parameter 35 Pe
230. onfiguring the Option Module Chapter 3 Setting the Subnet Mask 1 Verify that Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters 2 Set the value of Device Parameters 11 Subnet Cfg 1 through 14 Subnet Cfg 4 to the desired value for the subnet mask Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 3 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 Setting the Gateway Address 1 Verify that Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters 2 Set the value of Device Parameters 15 Gateway Cfg 1 through 18 Gateway Cfg 4 to the IP address of the gateway device Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 3 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 37 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Setting the Data Rate 38 By default the option module is set to autodetect so it automatically detects the data rate and duplex setting used on the network If you need to set a specific data rate and duplex setting the value of Device Parameter 19 Net Rate Cfg 1 determines the Ethernet data rate and duplex setting that will be used to communicate on the option modules ENET 1 network port For definitions of data rate and duplex see the Glossary
231. orks including EtherNet IP I O connections are used to transfer the data which controls the PowerFlex drive and sets its Reference I O can also be used to transfer data to and from Datalinks in PowerFlex 750 Series drives The option module includes the Logic Command Logic Status Reference Feedback and memory allocation for the Generic Ethernet module profile all as 32 bit words in the controller s I O image This basic I O must always be configured in the EtherNet bridge using RSLogix 5000 software Additional I O if needed can be set using up to 16 Datalinks to write data and or up to 16 Datalinks to read data When using any combination of these Datalinks add one 32 bit word for each Datalink to the basic I O Input Size and or Output Size Chapter 3 Configuring the Option Module and Chapter 4 Configuring the I O discuss how to configure the option module and controller on the network for the required I O The Glossary defines the different options This chapter discusses how to use I O after you have configured the option module and controller Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 87 Chapter 5 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Understanding the 0 Im age The terms izput and output are defined from the controller s point of view 88 Therefore output I O is data that is produced by the controller and consumed by the option module Input I O is status data that is produced by the option m
232. owerFlex 753 D ivel Data S DINT DL To Net 03 cH My_PowerFlex_753_Diivecl Data 6 DINT DL To Net 04 EH My Powerles 753 Drvel Da 7 DINT DL ToNet OS My PowerFlex_753_Diive l Datal8 DINT DL To Net 06 My PowerFlex 753 DrvelData S DINT DL To Net 07 753 DrvelData 10 DINT DL To Net 08 PowerFlex_753_Drive Data 11 DINT DL To Net 09 My PowerFlex_753_Drive l Data 12 DINT DL To Net 10 PowerFlex 753 DivelData 13 DINT DL To Net 11 My PowerFlex 753 DivelData4 DINT DL To Net 12 My Powerlex 753 DrvelData 15 DINT DL To Net 13 My PowerFlex 753 DrvelData16 DINT DL To Net 14 My PowerFlex 753 Di velData 17 DINT DL To Net 15 PowerFlex 753 Di velData 18 _ DINT DL To Net 16 Figure 14 Output Image Controller Tags Name Data Type Description My_PowerFlex_753_Drive O _ AB ETHERNET My_PowerFlex_753_Drive 0 Data DINT 18 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O D ata 0 DINT Logic Command My_PowerFlex_753 Drive O Data 1 DINT Speed Reference My PowerFlex 753 Drive 0 Data 2 DINT _ DL From Net 01 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O D ata 3 DINT _DL From Net 02 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive 0 Datal4 DINT _DL From Net 03 My PowerFlex 753 Drive 0 Data 5 DINT DL From Net 04 My PowerFlex 753 Drive O Data 5 DINT OL From Net 05 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive O Data 7 DINT _ DL From Net 06 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive 0 Data 8 DINT DL From Net 07 My_PowerFlex_753 Drive O
233. owerFlex_753_Diive O Private Network 1921681 Description IP Address 10 9 96 Host Name Module Definition Series Revision Electronic Keying Connection Parameters via Datainks Data Format Parameters 2 Click Change to open the Module Definition dialog box 3 Select the appropriate Electronic Keying for your application Module Definition 6 2 Input Data Dive Hotes 49 StopModeA age d ces qmm Special Types AccefTme2 ae 2 DecelTme1 Ae Decermet DeceiTme2 Bah DeceTme2 Selected Rating 480V 22 JogAccDecTme in JogaccDecTime Selected Catalog 20F D022 JogSpeedt 39 JegSpeect JogSpeed2 Ag meer or DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur when improperly using software to configure a drive Patameter names selected for the Input and Output Data appear as Connection Parameters via Datainks member names in the drive Module Defined Data Types and defines Data Format Parameters necessary Datalink parameters in the RSLogix 5000 project Actual data transfer between controller and drive is determined by Datalink If the revision of your drive is not listed parameters click Create Database button below drive is online Click Web Update to download the database from You must download configuration to the drive to ensure that the the web if drive is offline controller drive and com
234. p 2 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 so that changes to Device Parameter 39 DLs To Peer Cfg take effect Set Device Parameters 41 To Peer Period and 42 To Peer Skip as required for your application Parameter 41 controls how frequently the option module will transmit data when it is changing Parameter 42 controls how frequently the option module will transmit data when it is not changing Set Device Parameter 43 To Peer Enable to a value of 2 Custom Follow these steps to set up the slave receiver side of custom peer I O 1 Decide how many pieces of data Logic Command Reference and Datalink parameters you want to receive and set Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg to that value This must match the number of parameters transmitted by the master Determine how the Datalinks are allocated The highest numbered of the 16 Datalinks are allocated to peer I O For example if Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg is set to 37 Datalinks 14 15 and 16 are allocated to peer I O To avoid an overlap between Master Slave and peer I O make sure that Device Parameter 03 DLs From Net Act plus Device Parameter 28 DLs Fr Peer Cfg does not total more than 16 Set Host Parameters 1 through 16 DL From Net 01 16 to the parameters you want to receive based on the allocation in step 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P J
235. p mode Depending on the operating mode possible start up status indications are shown in Table 1 or Table 2 respectively Figure 7 Drive and Option Module Status Indicators ou JO 9195 et For possible start up status er indications see Table 1 for er Adapter mode operation or Table 2 for Tap mode operation Fs s Drive Control Pod A drive shown with cover removed ij I A UI Tu 26 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Installing the Option Module Chapter 2 Table 1 Adapter Mode Drive and Option Module Start Up Status Indications Item Color State Description STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Su Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing When running a type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to run When stopped a start inhibit condition exists and the drive cannot be started see drive parameter 933 Start Inhibits Steady A type 1 user config
236. p mode 152 resetting the option module 49 RSLinx Classic software documentation 8 using 53 RSLogix 5000 software 193 safety precautions 14 scanner 193 Serial Interface SI 193 specifications EtherNet IP address 190 EtherNet IP subnet mask 194 option module 137 status indicators definition 194 for Adapter mode operation MOD 114 115 NET B 115 PORT 114 for Tap mode operation LINK 1116 LINK 2 117 LINK 3 117 OK 116 locating 113 normal operation 26 troubleshooting with Adapter mode 114 115 Tap mode 116 117 understanding 113 stop action 194 Subnet Cfg 1 4 Device parameters Adapter mode 141 Tap mode 151 subnet mask definition 194 setting with BOOTP or DHCP server 32 setting with parameters 36 switches 194 T TCP Transmission Control Protocol 194 TCP IP Interface object 183 technical support 7 To Peer Enable Device parameter 145 To Peer Period Device parameter 145 To Peer Skip Device parameter 145 tools required 13 troubleshooting 113 124 U UDDT User Defined Data Type 194 UDP User Datagram Protocol 194 update definition 194 guidelines 52 uploading the EDS file 54 Ww Web Enable Device parameter Adapter mode 142 Tap mode 152 Web Features Device parameter 142 web pages enabling with parameter 48 for the option module 125 136 website for DriveExecutive software 190 DriveExplorer software 190 DriveTools SP software 190 EDS files 190 EtherNet IP 190 ODVA Open Dev
237. pand Port 0 Fault Queue n Home n Process display 9 TCP IP configuration Configure e mad notific Browse OPI devices Port 0 Powerflex 7 Module informatic Diagnostics Fauk queue Alarm queue bd gt nto jwww rodkwellautomation com Favorites BRockwel Automaton Allen Bradley SETS ea Automation Expand Minimize _ Port 0 Alan 0 n Process display TCP IP configuration Configure e mail notificz Browse DPI devices Port PowerFlex 7 Module informatio Diagnostics Fault queue Alarm queue gt SQ Local 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Chapter 8 Figure 48 shows an example event queue page for the Port 4 device EtherNet IP option module Figure 48 Example of Adapter Mode Port 4 20 750 ENETR Option Module Event Queue Page Rockwell Automation Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation G LAT 10 91 96 101 We Favorites G Rocet Automaton Rockwell Allen Bradley e 10 18 a Roten Expand Minimize A Port 4 Ever n Home Process display 9 TCP IP configuration Configure e mail notific Browse devices Ci Port 0 PowerFlex 7 Cad port 1 20 HIM x6 Port 2 Not Availabl Port Not Available G Port 4 amp therNet P 9 Module informatic Diagnostics queue v
238. parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Parameter 001 Output Frequency Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 008 Output Voltage Parameter 009 Output Power e Parameter 011 DC Bus Volts See DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Figure 30 Example Scattered Read Request Data Name amp Value Data Type Description L1 Scaltered Read Request DINT 10 Scattered_Read_Request 0 1 DINT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Request 1 0 DINT Pad Word rn Scattered Read Request 2 7 DINT Parameter Number decimal _ Scattered_Read_Request 3 DINT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 4 2 DINT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Request 5 0 DINT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 6 3 DINT Parameter Number decimal _ Scattered Read Request 7 0 DINT Pad Word i Scattered Read Request 8 11 DINT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 9 0 DINT Pad Word ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data The Scattered Read Request message reads the multiple parameters and returns their values to the destination tag Scattered_Read_Response Figure 31 shows the parameter values which in this example have been converted using a UDDT for correct presentation COP Copy instructions could have been used for this purpo
239. quired ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Host Parameter 34 Idle Flt Action lets you determine the action of the option module and connected drive when the controller is idle By default this parameter faults the drive You may configure this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a controller in idle state Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 147 Appendix 148 Option Module Parameters Parameter No 35 36 37 Name and Description Peer Fit Action Sets the action that the option module and drive will take if the option module detects that peer 1 0 communication has been disrupted This setting is effective only if 1 0 is transmitted through the option module When peer 1 0 communication is re established the drive will automatically receive commands over the network again A Default Values Type Reset Required 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Flt Cfg Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Host Parameter 35 Peer Flt Action lets you determine the action of the option module and connected drive if the option
240. r 7 When finished click OK 8 Perform all previous steps for each peripheral in the treeview on the Drive tab a Select the peripheral in the treeview b Click the Port Properties icon E to open the Properties dialog box 9 When finished configuring the drive and peripherals click OK to close the Module Properties dialog box for the drive the drive the next time the Logix controller establishes an 1 0 ATTENTION If you manually download any configuration changes to connection with the drive will still trigger an ADC download This synchronizes the configuration signatures in the controller and drive and prevents future ADC downloads from occurring unless a configuration change was made TIP When using version 4 01 Drive AOPs skip to step 13 10 Click the Drive tab 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 11 Click the ADC icon at to open the ADC Settings dialog box Automatic Device Configuration Settings Automatic Device Configuration ADC supports the automatic download of configuration data upon the Logix controller establishing a network connection to iz Vilargel 1 devices such as PowerFlex 755 drive and Rs peripherals C Enable Automatic Device Configuration Fai Drive Connection on Peripheral Error PowerFlex 755 20 HM x6 Safe Speed Mon VO Module 24V 8 Aux PwrSply 24 13 EtherNetaP 14 DeviceLogix
241. r 9F Hex 8 Class ID for the DP Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Scattered Read Request 4 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the option module drive Source Length 40 bytes 4 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered_Read_Response 5 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 2 My PowerFlex 755 Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered Read Message The namefor the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable When reading 32 bit REAL floating point parameters as in this example data conversion using COP Copy instructions or UDDTs is required to correctly show the parameter values 2 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder for this example My PowerFlex 755 Drive 3 See Table 5 on page 100 for limitations of PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or
242. r of components in the device connected to the option module This number of components can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class 1 Host 2 15 Peripherals Ports 1 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID A essRule Data Type Description 2 UINT Total number of instances Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Vendor ID UINT 1 Allen Bradley 2 Get Device Type UINT 142 3 Get Product Code UINT Number identifying product name and rating 4 Get Revision STRUCT of Major USINT Value varies Minor USINT Value varies 5 Get Status UINT Bit 0 Owned Bit 8 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 Major recoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique 32 bit number 7 Get Product Name SHORT_STRING Product name and rating Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Assembly Object EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x04 4 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances Instance Description 1 All 1 0 data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All 1 0 data written to the DPI device read write Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Revision UINT 2 2 Ge
243. r tags Figure 11 for the entire I O image in Chapter 4 you can use these tags to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView and so forth to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive user defined Program tags Figure 15 and a ladder logic program that will pass the Controller tag data to the Program tags Figure 15 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Add on Profile Ladder Logic Program Example V Value Status_Reverse o BOOL Status_Ready o BODL Status Forward 2 BOOL Status Faulted o BOOL Status At Speed o BODL Status Active o BOOL EE ET ES ERE E ES ae Speed Reference 0 0 REAL Speed Feedback 0 0 REAL Command_Stop o BOOL Command_Start 2 BOOL Command_Jog 0 BOOL Command_Forward_Reverse 0 BOOL Command_Clear_Faults An example ladder logic program that uses the automatically created descriptive Controller tags and passes their data to the user defined Program tags is shown in Figure 16 and Figure 17 Note that the prefix for the drive Controller tags is determined by the name assigned when configuring the I O Chapter 4 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Chapter 5 Figure 16 ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add on Profile for Logic Status Feedb
244. rFlex 750 Series drives with the 20 750 ENETR option module 2 From the list select the drive and its connected option module For this example we selected PowerFlex 753 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 The drive s New Module dialog box appears New Module General Connection Module Info Configuration Dive Type PowerFlex 753 AC Drive via ENETR Vendor Alen Biadey Parent IP Bridge Ethemet Address Name My 753 Dive OPswseNewok 1921681 Description IP Address 18 91 98 O Host Name Module Definition Revision 51 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Conmecton Parameters via Ostainks Data Format Parameters 4 On the General tab edit the following data about the drive option module Box Setting Name Aname to identify the drive Description Optional description of the drive option module IP Address The IP address of the option module 5 On the New Module dialog box in the Module Definition section click Change to launch the Module Definition dialog box and begin the drive option module configuration process Module Definition 6 2 Input Data Output Data LogicCommand Compatible Module Feedback Reference Use Network Reference 430V 22 ND 14 HD Normal Duty pA BA BI BA EA
245. re is a tool for configuring and monitoring controllers to communicate with connected devices It is a 32 bit application that runs on various Windows operating systems Information about RSLogix software can be found at http www software rockwell com rslogix A scanner is a separate module of a multi module controller or a built in component of a single module controller that provides communication with Option Modules connected to a network See also Controller next generation communication interface used by various Allen Bradley drives such as PowerFlex 750 Series drives Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 193 Glossary Status Indicators Stop Action Subnet Mask Switches TCP Transmission Control Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol UDDT User Defined Data Type Update Zero Data Status indicators are LEDs that are used to report the status of the option module network and drive They are on the option module and can be viewed when the drive is powered and its cover is removed When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the option module and drive can respond with a stop action A stop action results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command Reference and Datalink data If the drive was running and using the Reference from the option module it will stay running but at zero Reference An extension to the IP addressing scheme tha
246. required for your application in the Data Format field Input Data Assigns selected drive or connected peripheral parameters to be READ by the controller using DL To Net Datalinks See steps 6a through 6e below for details Output Data Assigns selected drive or connected peripheral parameters to be WRITTEN by the controller using DL From Net Datalinks See steps 6a through 6e below for details Use Network Reference Conveniently selects the speed reference for the drive to come from the network This box is checked by default On the Module Definition dialog box notice that the automatically assigned controller tags DriveStatus Feedback LogicCommand and Reference are always used However when using Datalinks you must still assign Host Parameters 01 16 DL From Net 01 16 and Host Parameters 17 32 DL To Net 01 16 to point to the appropriate drive or connected peripheral 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the O Chapter 4 parameters The procedure to configure the Datalinks on the Module Definition dialog box for the Input Data and Output Data is the same a Click the button in the topmost blank row to display the Parameter Properties dialog box for the corresponding Datalink IMPORTANT Always use the Datalink parameters in consecutive numerical order starting with the first parameter For example use Parameters 01 02 and 03 to configure three
247. rite Yes 0 No Link 12 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Dup IP Addr Read Only 0 Ready 0 Ready 1 Reset Module 2 Set Defaults Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the option module is transmitting 1 0 that controls the drive the drive may fault when you reset the option module Determine how your drive will 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Write No Host Parameters Tap Mode When operating the option module in Tap mode Host parameters are NOT supported Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Supported Data Types Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only This appendix presents information about the EtherNet IP objects that can be accessed using Explicit Messages For information on the format of Explicit Messages and example ladder logic programs see Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Object ClassCode Page Object dasCode Page Hex Dec Hex Dec Identity Object oor 1 154 DPlAlarm Object 12 11 _ Assembly Object 0x04 4 155 DPI Diagnostic Object 0x99 153 173 Register Object 0x07 7 156 DPI Time Object 0x9B 155 175 PCCC Object 0x67 103 157 Host DPI Parameter Object Ox9F 159 177 DPI Device Object 0x92 146 160 TCP IP Interface Object OxF5 245 183 DP
248. rives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow a drive parameter value to be read or written to without using an Explicit Message When enabled each Datalink occupies one 32 bit word in a ControlLogix controller The following rules apply when using PowerFlex 750 Series drive Datalinks The target of a Datalink can be any Host parameter including those of a peripheral For example drive parameter 535 Accel Time 1 can be the target of any or all option modules installed in the drive The data passed through the drive s Datalink mechanism is determined by the settings of Host Parameters 01 16 DL From Net 01 16 and Host Parameters 17 32 DL To Net 01 16 IMPORTANT is always required after configuring Datalinks so that the changes take effect When an I O connection that includes Datalinks is active those Datalinks being used are locked and cannot be changed until that I O connection becomes idle or inactive When you use a Datalink to change a value the value is NOT written to the Nonvolatile Storage NVS The value is stored in volatile memory and lost when the drive loses power Thus use Datalinks when you need to change a value of a parameter frequently Datalinks for PowerFlex 750 Series drive peripherals embedded EtherNet IP adapter on PowerFlex 755 drives only and option modules such as an encoder or a communication module are locked when the peripheral has an I O co
249. rnet Address MAC 3 Onacomputer connected to the EtherNet IP network start the BOOTP DHCP software Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 33 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module The BOOTP DHCP Server dialog box appears BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Fie Tools Help Request History Clear History heminisec Ethemet Address MAC EthemetAddess Type IP Address Status Unable to service BOOTP request from 00 00 85 52 37 To properly configure devices on the EtherNet IP network you must configure settings in the BOOTP DHCP software to match the network 4 From the Tools menu choose Network Settings The Network Settings dialog box opens 5 BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Request History hrmin sec Type Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Network Settings Defaults Subnet Mask 248 10 91 986 1 Relation List Tem Primary DNS 200 78 Elhemet Address Secondary DNS 200 78 Domain na home ra int com Cancel 5 Edit the following Box Type Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the option module s network Gateway 0 The IP address of the gateway device on the option module s network Primary DNS The address of the primary DNS server to be used on the local en
250. rs in the I O Configuration folder In our example a 1756 EN2TR bridge appears under the I O Configuration folder with its assigned name 3 6 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 A7 0 1756473 v20_Example_using_207S0ENETR_for_PF753 3 3 1756 EN2TR My_EtherNet_IP_DLR_ Bridge dy Ethernet There are two ways to add the option module into the I O configuration e Drive Add on Profiles RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later Generic Profile RSLogix 5000 software all versions These are described in the following separate sections If your version of RSLogix 5000 software supports drive Add on Profiles we recommend that you use this method Using RSLogix 5000 Drive Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later When compared to using the Generic Profile all versions the RSLogix 5000 drive Add on Profiles provide the following advantages Profiles for specific drives that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback and Datalinks Additionally Datalinks automatically take the name of the drive parameter to which they are assigned These profiles virtually eliminate I O mismatch errors and substantially reduce drive configuration time New Drive tab eliminates the need for a separate drive software configuration tool e Drive configuration settings are saved as part of the RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later project file ACD and
251. rsions We recommend that you only use the basic RSLogix 5000 software Generic Profile for any of the following reasons e specific drive profile in other versions of RSLogix 5000 software is unavailable Users are already familiar with a Generic Profile and do not want to convert an existing project to a drive Add on Profile RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 e A project must maintain specific revision level control The controller cannot be taken offline RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later enables the drive Generic Profile to be added while the controller is online and in the Run mode Adding the Drive Option Module to the 1 0 Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge 1 In the treeview right click the bridge and choose New Module to display the Select Module dialog box Select Module Type 222 4222 Module Types Found Cee on Crese In our example we right click the 1756 EN2TR A bridge 2 Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules 3 Select ETHERNET MODULF from the list to configure the drive and its connected EtherNet IP option module 4 Click OK The drive s New Module dialog box appears New Module ETHERNET MODULE Genenc Ethemet
252. s This does not clear links to function blocks Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 17 AppendixC _EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline Minimum value CONTAINER Offline Maximum value CONTAINER Offline Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad byte always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value UINT Multiplier UNIT Divisor UNIT Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of B00L 32 Descriptor see page 180 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value UINT Next parameter UINT Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor 2 UINT Base 0 INT Offset 2 USINT 3 Link source of the value 0 no link USINT Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor B00L 32 Descriptor see page 180 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parame
253. s Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 1 0 Decimal Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 10 Decimal Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Allocation Size in bytes Class Instance Par Number Value 0x4D Yes No Get Attributes Scattered 4 4 Ox4E Yes No Set Attributes Scattered 4 4 The table below lists the parameters for the Get Attributes Scattered and Set Attributes Scattered object specific service Name DataType Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter to read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter
254. s Programming Manual publication 750 PMOOL lists the data type for each parameter When performing a Scattered Read of REAL data type parameters the DINT parameter value in the Response Destination Data array will need to be COP to a REAL tag Figure 36 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages DINT 0 wo COND Ww w UL LO UJ UJ MJ MJ MJ M2 SP PS SP SP RP eK HK Un gt oU S iO DN gt CO iO gt v Request Source Data Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad Parameter Number Pad eo No Parameter Number Pad DINT 0 wo OND uUa RA UWV Response Destination Data Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter Number Parameter Value Parameter
255. s after the Logix controller establishes an EcherNet IP network connection to a PowerFlex 750 Series drive firmware revision 4 001 or later and its associated peripherals An RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later project ACD file contains the configuration settings for any PowerFlex drives in the project When the project is downloaded to the Logix controller these settings are also transferred and reside in the controllers memory Prior to ADC in RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 downloading PowerFlex 750 Series drive configuration data was a manual process where the user would open the Drive tab in the respective Drive Add on Profile AOP in RSLogix 5000 software and click the Download icon ADC in RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 or later now automates the Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 67 Chapter 4 68 Configuring the 1 0 process and saves the user time It is particularly beneficial in a drive replacement situation when a production line is down TIP Use with Stratix 6000 and 8000 switches to provide dynamic IP address assignment by port This eliminates the need for the user to manually enter the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address prior to connecting a replacement drive to the Ethernet network ADC can also work in tandem with Firmware Supervisor If Firmware Supervisor is set up and enabled for a drive Exact Match keying must be used the drive periphera
256. s motion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration soins ak e Se pada ba doe age incer ts cose Verily these devices drives network devices 3rd party products Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 TIP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online find your controller in the Who Active dialog box From the Communications menu choose Who Active After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver with RSLinx software See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 53 and RSLinx online help for details 2 Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the dialog box should be flashing green Also a yellow warning symbol should be displayed on the I O Configuration folder in the treeview and on the drive profile If the controller was in Run Mode before clicking Download RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to change the controller mode back to Remote Run In this case choose the appropriate mode for your application If the con
257. se DHCP as the source for the IP address the Node Address switches must be set to a value other than 001 254 or 888 and Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel must be set to 3 DHCP IMPORTANT Whenthe DHCP lease expires the option module stops communicating on the network requiring a power cycle or option module reset Note the option module s hardware Ethernet Address MAC on the module s data nameplate label on the backside of the circuit board which will be used in step 7 when configuring the DHCP server see Using a BOOTP or DHCP Server on page 32 for details IMPORTANT Regardless of the method used to set the option module network node address each node on the EtherNet IP network must have a unique IP address To change a node address you must set the new value and then remove and reapply power to or reset the option module Figure 2 Setting the Node Address Switches Hundreds Position a Tens Position Ones Position Settings Description 001 254 The option module will use the Node Address switch settings for the network node address 192 168 1 xxx where xxx rotary switch settings The value stored in Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is automatically ignored Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 21 Chapter2 Installing the Option Module Connecting the Option Module to the Drive 22
258. se instead of a UDDT If the parameters being read are 32 bit integers do not COP the data to a REAL tag Figure 31 Example Scattered Read Response Converted Data Name Data Type Description Scattered_Read_Response Scattered Rea Scattered_Read_Response Output_Frequency_Par_No Scattered Read Response Dutput Current Par No Scattered Read Response Dutput Current Value Scattered Read Response Output Voltage Par No 9 Scattered_Read_Response Qutput_Voltage_Par_Value Scattered Read Response Dutpul Frequency Value Scaltered Read Response Dutput Power Par No Scaltered Read Response Output Power Par Value H Scattered_Read_Response DC_Bus_Volts_Par_No Scattered Read Response DC Bus Volts Par Value In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value 1 Output Frequency 60 205975 Hz 7 Output Current 12 570678 Amp 8 Output Voltage 418 34348V AC 9 Output Power 12 3534 kW 11 DC Bus Volts 566 5277V DC Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 107 Chapter 6 108 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters A Scattered Write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five 32 b
259. server as the source for the IP address subnet mask and gateway address for the option module To use option module parameters instead you must first change the source for the node address to Parameters and then set the associated option module parameters as described in the following subsections Changing the Source for the Node Address 1 Verify that the Node Address switches Figure 2 on page 21 are set to any value other than 001 254 or 888 The default setting is 999 2 Set the value of Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel to 1 Parameters Value Setting 1 Parameters 2 BOOTP 3 DHCP default 3 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 Perform the steps in the following subsections to set the IP address subnet mask and gateway address using the option module parameters Setting the IP Address 1 Verify that Device Parameter 05 Net Addr Sel is set to 1 Parameters 2 Set the value of Device Parameters 07 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 10 IP Addr Cfg 4 to a unique IP address Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 3 Reset the option module see Resetting the Option Module on page 49 The NET A status indicator will be steady green or flashing green if the IP address is correctly configured 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 C
260. show the faulted ports Examples of potential issues solutions are shown in the following table 80 Issue Compatible module keying selected but replacement drive or peripheral has an earlier firmware revision than the failed device Solution Replace device with a revision that is later than or equal to the failed device If necessary use ControlFLASH to upgrade the replacement device first to an acceptable revision level Peripheral is required for connection Fail Drive Connection on Peripheral Error was checked but it is missing Add required peripheral or remove peripheral from RSLogix 5000 project for the drive and download project to the controller A Safe Speed Monitor Module is used A manual step is required to enter the safety password and validate the system See the section Special Considerations When Using a 20 750 S1 Safe Speed Monitor Module on page 77 for additional information Parameter out of range error ADC wrote a value to a parameter that was out of range typically would only occur during initial commissioning of a drive system Use any available drive software tool to view a linear list of changed parameters to see if the configured value is outside the minimum maximum value Version 4 02 or later Drive AOPs are the preferred tool and will highlight any out of range parameter in the Linear List editor Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All Ve
261. splays the actual speed and duplex network data rate for the option module s ENET2 network port Net Rate Cfg 3 Sets the speed and duplex network data rate at which the option module communicates on its ENET3 DEVICE port Updates Device Parameter 24 Net Rate Act 3 after a reset Net Rate Act 3 Displays the actual speed and duplex network data rate for the option module s ENET3 DEVICE port Reset Module No action if set to 0 Ready Resets the option module if set to 1 Reset Module Restores the option module to its factory default settings if set to 2 Set Defaults This parameter is a command It will be reset to 0 Ready after the command has been performed When performing a Set Defaults the drive may detect a conflict If this occurs the drive will not allow a Set Defaults action You must resolve the conflict before attempting a Set Defaults action for the option module A Values Type Default Values Type Reset Required Values Type Default Values Type Reset Required respond before resetting the option module Web Enable Enables disables the option module s web pages Default Values Type Reset Required 0 No Link 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Dup IP Addr Read Only 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half 5 Disabled Read W
262. t e Support service agreements Technical Product Assistance For technical assistance please review the information in Chapter 7 Troubleshooting first If you still have problems then access the Allen Bradley Technical Support website at http www ab com support abdrives or contact Rockwell Automation Preface Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Resource Network Communication Option Module Installation Instructions publication 750COM IN002 Description Information on the installation of PowerFlex 750 Series Network Communication Modules EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication 148 1 EtherNet IP Network Infrastructure Guidelines ODVA publication 35 1 Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual publication ENET RM002 EtherNet IP Embedded Switch Technology Linear and Device level Ring Topologies publication ENET AP005 Information on the planning installation and techniques used to implement an EtherNet IP network DriveExplorer website http www ab com drives driveexplorer and online help 9 Information on using the DriveExplorer software tool DriveExecutive website http www ab com drives drivetools and online help 9 Information on using the DriveExecutive software tool PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Installation Instructions publication 750
263. t Max Instance UINT 2 100 Set Control Timeout UINT Control timeout in seconds Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Number of Members UINT 1 2 Get Member List ARRAY of STRUCT UINT Size of member data UINT Size of member path Packed EPATH Member path 3 Conditional Data Array of Bits Data to be transferred 4 Get Size UINT Size of assembly data in bits 1 Forinstance 1 access rule for the data attribute is Get For instance 2 it is Get Set IMPORTANT Setting an assembly object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 155 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Register Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x07 7 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances Instance Description 1 All 1 0 data being read from the option module read only 2 All 1 0 data written to the option module read write 3 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 4 Logic Command and Reference data read write 5 DL To Net 01 input data from option module to scanner read only 6 DL From Net 01 output data from scanner to option module read write 35 DL To Net 16 input data from option
264. t lets you use a single network ID for multiple physical networks A bit mask identifies the part of the address that specifies the network and the part of the address that specifies the unique node on the network A 1 in the subnet mask indicates the bit is used to specify the network A 0 in the subnet mask indicates that the bit is used to specify the node For example a subnet mask on a network may appear as follows 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 255 255 255 192 This mask indicates that 26 bits are used to identify the network and 6 bits are used to identify devices on each network Instead of a single physical Class C network with 254 devices this subnet mask divides it into four networks with up to 62 devices each Network devices that provide virtual connections that help to control collisions and reduce traffic on the network They are able to reduce network congestion by transmitting packets to an individual port only if they are destined for the connected device In a control application in which real time data access is critical network switches may be required in place of hubs EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer Explicit Messaging packets using IP TCP guarantees delivery of data through the use of retries EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer I O packets using IP UDP provides a simple but fast capability to send I O messaging packets between devices This protocol verifies that option modules tr
265. t8685 na home ra int com Address 131 200 78 12 Non authoritative answer smtp rockwell com Address 131 208 165 58 4 Click Save Changes IMPORTANT After configuring E mail Notification it is recommended to protect the settings Otherwise the configuration can be changed anytime the web page is accessed with a browser To protect the settings use Device Parameter 27 Web Features to set E mail Cfg Bit 0 value to 0 Disabled Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 131 Chapter8 Viewing Option Module Web Pages Figure 43 shows an example e mail message automatically sent by the option module in response to selected events Figure 43 Example of E mail Message Sent by the Option Module PowerFlex753 10 91 96 101 To 05 18 2012 11 13 bee Subject Notice from example drive Seq 2 Drive at 10 91 96 101 reported fault 82 Port 2 DPI Loss This is an automated message from the PowerFlex 753 EtherNev IP port at IP address 10 91 96 101 Please do not reply to this message as the drive cannot process replies The drive has logged the following fault trip Fault code 82 Fault text Port 2 DPI loss See this device s Web page at http 10 91 96 101 TIP To stop e mail messages uncheck all of the Send an e mail message when boxes Disabling the option module web pages by setting
266. tatus Indicator Adapter Mode This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the option module s connection to the drive as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The option module is not powered or is not properly connected to Securely connect and ground the option module to the drive by fully the drive inserting it into the drive port and tightening its two captive screws to the recommended torque Apply power to the drive Flashing Red The option module is not communicating with the drive via DPI e Verify that the option module is properly inserted in the drive port Cycle power the drive Steady Red The drive has refused 1 0 connection from the option module Important Cycle power to the drive after making any of the following corrections e Securely connect and ground the option module to the drive by fully inserting it into the drive port and tightening its two captive screws to the recommended torque e Verify that the drive supports the Comm Driver Flashing Orange The option module is not compatible with the drive Install the option module into a compatible product of the same brand an Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series drive Flashing Green The option module is establishing an 1 0 connection to the drive No action required Normal behavior if no 1 0 is enabled Steady Green The option module is properly connected and is communicating No action required with
267. tention page 99 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 179 Appendix 180 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Descriptor Attributes Bit Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 1 Data Type Bit 2 000 USINT used as an array of Boolean 2 Data Type Bit 3 001 UINT used as an array of Boolean 010 USINT 8 bit integer 011 UINT 16 bit integer 100 UDINT 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not Unicode or 16 bits Unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 unsigned 1 signed 4 Hidden 0 visible 1 hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 May be the sink end of a link 1 May not be the sink end of a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled for example drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13
268. ter value in NVS 3 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory Valid only for DPI drives 11 Get Set DPI Link USINT 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance UINT ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of B00L 32 Descriptor see page 180 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 16 Get Parameter Processing Error USINT 0 No error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 18 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 19 Get International Online Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online units 20 Get International DPI Online Struct of Read Full B00L 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default valu
269. tered_Write_Request Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the option module drive Source Length 40 bytes Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered_Write_Response 6 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 3 My PowerFlex 755 Drive The path is the route that the message will follow TagTab Example Value Description Name Scattered Write Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable When writing to 32 bit REAL floating point parameters as in this example data conversion using COP Copy instructions or UDDTs is required to correctly write the parameter values 2 Scattered writes always write parameter values to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory so these values will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important Be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder for this example My_PowerFlex_755_Drive 4 See Table 5 on page 10
270. th respect to keying Disabled When using ADC this selection should generally not be used This selection allows a replacement drive to have different Major X xxx and or Minor firmware revision It is up to the user to provide a replacement that has a firmware revision later than or equal to the original drive If a replacement drive with older firmware is used the ADC download may fail Keying for peripherals is managed via the respective Port Properties dialog box for each peripheral Electronic Keying for the embedded EtherNet IP adapter only Port 13 on PowerFlex 755 drives and DeviceLogix Port 14 ports are Disabled by default Both ports do not have individual firmware and are currently managed by the drive s firmware Port 0 If you set either of these to Exact Match Firmware Supervisor will be unable to locate the upgrade files during setup If the Fault Drive Connection on Peripheral Error checkbox is selected and there is a mismatch or failure while connecting to or configuring these two ports the overall ADC process will fail and no I O connection will be made to the drive Electronic Keying for HIMs and serial converters 1203 SSS and 1203 USB are disabled by default These are typically temporary devices or used for monitoring purposes only and therefore do not matter if they are present or not You still have the option to select these to other Keying selections if desired
271. the Source Length field on the Message Configuration dialog box must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a REAL or DINT or 2 bytes for an INT See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Using Explicit Messaging Adapter mode only Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters A Scattered Read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Parameter 001 Output Frequency Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 008 Output Voltage Parameter 009 Output Power e Parameter 011 DC Bus Volts See DPI Parameter Object on page 163 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page 177 Class code 0x9F for parameter numbering Table 8 Example Controller Tags to Read Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Scattered Read Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Read Message BOOL MSG Scattered Read Message MESSAGE Figure 28 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters Execute_Scattered_Read_Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Scattered Read Message CDN gt FCER Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A
272. the appropriate corrective action The option module has an EEPROM fault The network address switches have been changed since powerup A duplicate IP address fault has been detected The DHCP lease has expired The network address switches are set to 888 The network configuration IP address subnet mask gateway address is invalid The User FPGA configuration is invalid Steady Red The option module is not communicating with the drive via DPI Important Cycle power to the drive after making any of the following corrections e Securely connect and ground the option module to the drive by fully inserting it into the drive port and tightening its two captive screws to the recommended torque e Verify that the drive supports the Comm Driver Flashing Green The option module is establishing DPI communication with the drive No action required Normal behavior if no 1 0 is enabled Steady Green The option module has established DPI communication with the drive No action required LINK 1 Status Indicator Tap Mode This green yellow bicolor LED indicates the status of the ENET1 network port as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The option module is not properly connected to the network Securely connect the option module to the network using an Ethernet cable Also make sure the Ethernet cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet connector Steady Green ENET1 network port has a 100 Mbps net
273. the drive MOD Status Indicator Adapter Mode This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the option module as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The option module is not powered or is not properly connected to Securely connect and ground the option module to the drive by fully the drive inserting it into the drive port and tightening its two captive screws to the recommended torque Apply power to the drive Flashing Red The drive is in firmware upgrade mode View the option module event queue to determine which of these conditions is The option module has an EEPROM fault The network address switches have been changed since powerup A duplicate IP address fault has been detected The DHCP lease has expired The network address switches are set to 888 The network configuration IP address subnet mask gateway address is invalid The User FPGA configuration is invalid present Then depending on the cause take the appropriate corrective action e Clear faults in the option module Cycle power to the drive e If cycling power does not correct the problem the option module parameter settings may have been corrupted Reset defaults and reconfigure the option module e Ifresetting defaults does not correct the problem update the option module with the latest firmware revision Change the network address switches to a value other than 888 Flashing Green The option m
274. therNetIP EtherNetlPLibrary tabid 76 Default aspx 2 Theonline help is installed with the software You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative visit www rockwellautomation com locations For information such as firmware updates or answers to drive related questions go to the Drives Service amp Support website at http www ab com support abdrives and click the Downloads or Knowledgebase link 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Components JE ADPTR J4 TAP 300 Component Side View Getting Started Chapter 1 The 20 750 ENETR Option Module is intended for installation into PowerFlex 750 Series drive and is used for network communication Topic Page Components 9 Features 10 Option Module Operating Modes 11 Compatible Products 13 Required Equipment 13 Safety Precautions 14 Quick Start 15 Item Part Description o Status Indicators Four status indicators that indicate the status of the option module and network communicati
275. tion Step Action See 1 Review the safety precautions for the option module Throughout this manual 2 Verify that the PowerFlex drive is properly installed PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drive Installation Instructions publication 750 IN001 3 Set the option module IP address Chapter 2 a When using the option module node address switches set the IP Installing the Option Module address now and proceed with step 4 When using a DHCP or BOOTP server or option module parameters instead to set the IP address first perform step 3b and all of step 4 Then proceed with Step 5 b Verify that the PowerFlex drive is not powered 4 Install the option module Network Communication Option ipa Card Installation Instructions a Insert the option module in drive Port 4 5 or 6 Use the captive ee d crews to secure and ground the option module to the drive ipd 750COM IN002 and b Connect the option module to the network by using an Ethernet installing the Option Module cable 5 Apply power to the option module Chapter 2 Installing the Option Modul a The option module receives power from the drive Verify that the Ue option module is installed correctly and then apply power to the drive The status indicators should be green If they flash red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting b Configure and verify key drive parameters 6 Configure the option module for your application Chapter 3 Configuring the Option Modul
276. tion 1770 6 5 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 EtherNet IP Objects Adapter mode only Appendix N Files N File Description N42 This N file lets you read and write some values configuring the port N42 3 Time out read write Time in seconds allowed between messages to the N45 file If the option module does not receive a message in the specified time it performs the fault action configured in its Comm Fit Action parameter A valid setting is between 1 and 32767 seconds 5 20 seconds is recommended N42 7 Option module Port Number read only Drive port in which option module resides N42 8 Peer Option Modules read only Bit field of devices with peer messaging capabilities N45 This N file lets you read and write control 1 0 messages You can write control 1 0 messages only when all of the following conditions are true The option module is not receiving 1 0 from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the option module is not mapped to the scanner The option module is not receiving Peer 1 0 from another option module The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read N45 0 Logic Command least significant Logic Status least significant N45 1 Logic Command most significant Logic Status most significant N52 Reference least significant Feedback least sig
277. tion about configuring option module e mail messaging or to stop e mail messages see Adapter Mode Configure E mail Notification Web Page on page 130 Bit Description 0 E mail Cfg Default 1 Enabled 1 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit In the example above it equals 1 Enabled Changes to this parameter take effect immediately A reset is not required Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuring the Option Module Chapter 3 Resetting the Option Module Changes to switch and jumper settings and some option module parameters require you to reset the option module before the new settings take effect You can reset the option module by power cycling the drive or by using Device Parameter 25 Reset Module transmitting control 1 0 to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the option module Determine how your drive will respond before resetting the option module ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the option module is Set Device Parameter 25 Reset Module to 1 Reset Module Value Description 0 Ready Default 1 Reset Module 2 Set Defaults When you enter 1 Reset Module the option module will be immediately reset An alternate method to reset the module is by power cycling the drive When you enter 2 Set Defaults the option module will set ALL of its Device and Host parameters to their factor
278. tion module failed to log into the Serial Interface 28 SI Comm Fault The Serial Interface Communication has faulted Network Events 29 30 Reserved 31 Net Dup Address The option module uses the same address as another device on the network 32 et Comm Fault The option module detected a communication fault on the network 33 et Sent Reset The option module received a reset from the network 34 Net 10 Close An 1 0 connection from the network to the option module was closed 35 Net Idle Fault The option module received idle packets from the network 36 et 10 Open 1 0 connection from the network to the option module has been opened Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 123 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Table 12 Option Module Events Continued Code Event Text Description 37 Net 10 Timeout An 1 0 connection from the network to the option module has timed out 38 Net 10 Size Err The option module received an incorrectly sized 1 0 packet 39 PCCCIO Close The device sending PCCC Control messages to the option module has set the PCCC Control Timeout to zero 40 PCCCIO Open The option module has begun receiving PCCC control messages the PCCC Control Timeout was previously set to a non zero value 41 PCCC 10 Timeout The option module has not received a PCCC Control message for longer than the PCCC Control Timeout 42 Ms
279. tion module on its ENET2 network port 65 Net Link 3 Up A network link was available for the option module on its ENET3 DEVICE network port 66 Net Link 3 Down The network link was removed from the option module on its ENET3 DEVICE network port 67 Net Ring Up The Device Level Ring DLR status is Normal 68 Net Ring Down The Device Level RIng DLR status is Faulted 69 Invalid Net Cfg The option module s network address configuration parameters are invalid or the network address provided by the BOOTP or DHCP server is invalid 70 DHCP Response The option module received a response to its DHCP request 71 DHCP Renew The option module renewed its network address lease with the DHCP server 72 DHCP Rebind The option module rebinded its network address lease with the DHCP server 73 DHCP Release The option module s network address lease expired 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Enabling the Option Module Web Pages Viewing Web Pages in Adapter Mode Chapter 8 Viewing Option Module Web Pages This chapter provides instructions on how to monitor the PowerFlex 750 Series drive and its EtherNet IP option module by using the module s web interface Topic Page Enabling the Option Module Web Pages 05 Viewing Web Pages in Adapter Mode 125 Adapter Mode Process Display Pop up Dialog Box 128 Adapter Mode TCP IP Configuration Web Page 129 Adapter Mode Configure
280. tiple Parameters Figure 33 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Dialog Boxes Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Scattered_Write_Message Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_755_Drive Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic x P Custom v Source Element Scattered Write Req v Source Length 40 zd Bytes Service Code Class 93 Hex Destination Scattered Wile Re v Instance 0 Aitribute O Hex _NewTag Q Enable Enable Waiting Stat Q Done Done Length 0 Eror Coc Extended Error Code Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the DPI Parameter Object in the option module Service Type m Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4e Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 4 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Scat
281. to its open position to access the drive control pod 3 Use static control precautions 4 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the network Examples of different EtherNet IP network topologies are shown in Figure 3 Figure 4 and Figure 5 For information about linear and device level ring DLR topologies see EtherNet IP Embedded Switch Technology publication ENET AP005 IMPORTANT The option module has EtherNet IP embedded switch technology and ENET1 and ENET2 network ports to connect to a linear or device level ring DLR network in a single subnet You cannot use ENET1 and 2 network ports as two network interface cards connected to two different subnets Figure 3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable in a Star Topology Network PowerFlex 750 Series Drives ontrorer with 20 750 ENETR Option Modules ControlLogix controller shown with 1756 ENBT Bridge To other X EtherNet IP sce S networks ia L Computer with Ethernet Connection External EE Ethernet Switch 9 The ethernet cable may be connected to the option module s ENET1 or ENET 2 network port Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 23 Chapter 2 24 Installing the Option Module Figure 4 Connecting the Ethernet Cable in a Linear Topology Network PowerFlex 750 Ser
282. troller was in Program Mode before clicking Download this prompt will not appear 3 From the File menu choose Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer To be sure that present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload and save the values Correlating the Drive with the Controller You must now correlate the drive settings to the RSLogix 5000 project I O settings so that they match This requires loading the project I O settings into the drive 1 In the treeview under I O Configuration right click the drive profile for this example My PowerFlex 753 Drive and choose Properties Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 65 Chapter 4 66 Configuring the 1 0 2 3 5 Click the Drive tab Wi Module Properties My_EtherNet_IP_DLR_Bridge 0 PowerFlex 753 ENETR 6 2 General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive erg mo A Ro Drive Not Connected Connect to Drive Correlation with online drive has not been completed No drive data can be displayed correlation has completed successfully Click the Connect to Drive button to begin correlation Click Connect to Drive to begin the correlation process After the drive configuration data has
283. ts description 13 documentation for 8 components of the option module 9 configuration tools 31 connecting option module tothe drive 22 to the network 23 ControlFLASH 189 controller 189 ControlLogix controller configuring the 1 0 54 explicit messaging 101 using the 1 0 92 D data rate definition 189 setting 38 Datalinks Host parameters DL From Net 01 16 and DL To Net 01 16 definition 189 1 0 image 88 using 90 Device parameters list Adapter mode 140 145 Tap mode 150 152 device level ring DLR definition 190 network example 24 Index DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol definition 190 free server application 190 diagnostic items Adapter mode 118 Tap mode 121 DLFrom Net 01 16 Host parameters 146 DLTo Net 01 16 Host parameters 146 DLs Fr Peer Act Device parameter 143 DLs Fr Peer Cfg Device parameter 143 DLs From Net Act Device parameter 140 DLs To Net Act Device parameter 140 DLs To Peer Act Device parameter 145 DLs To Peer Cfg Device parameter 145 documentation for compatible products 8 DPI Alarm object 171 DPI Device object 160 DPI Diagnostic object 173 DPI Fault object 169 DPI Parameter object 163 DPI Time object 175 DriveExecutive software definition website 190 option module configuration tool 31 DriveExplorer software definition website 190 free lite version 190 option module configuration tool 31 drives see PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class drives DriveTools SP software 190
284. tting Started Installing the Option Module Configuring the Option Module Configuring the 1 0 Table of Contents Conventions Used in This Manual eese Rockwell Automation SuppOEt s ex cue uelti tae ER cnc a Additional Resources l c sees Chapter 1 M Lr c outre sig s eui uses efe a Mates roseis Ud Option Module Operating Modes rtr meyer mee panes Understanding Parameter ho tpe RA ae ted Compatible Products REESE AE ear eyes Required Equipment 230 21 ibl tota vdd Safety Precautions coeno ede delayed ideis us euh nacio uo einen D eur eoo Adie Chapter 2 Preparing for an ERG Setting the Operating Mode e Sae t etd Setting the Node Address co noe oA ger er opea Kee PRECES Connecting the Option Module to the Connecting the Option Module to the Applying gv tee ter E PARERE CU REIP Commissioning the Option Module Chapter 3 Configuration Tools o sae ee er CR as Using the PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM to Access Parameters ssc oec oe vel dass E ere UI bite x Setting the Option Module Node Setting the Data
285. tus SpdRiefBiM 5 BOOL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l DriveStatus_Running c BooL My PowerFlex 753 Drive DriveStatus Jogging c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive DriveStatus_ Stopping 2 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus_DCBraking BOOL My__PowerFlex_753_Drive l DriveStatus_DBActive BOOL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive DriveStatus SpeedMode c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive DriveStatus c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drivel DriveStatus_TorqueMode c BOOL My Powedflex 753 Drive DriveStatus AlZetoSpeed c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive DriveStatus AlHome c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus AlLimi 2 BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus Curiimit BOOL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l DriveStatus BusFreRieg BOOL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l DriveStatus_EnableOn c BOOL PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus MotorOL c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drive l DriveStatus Regen c BOOL My PowerFlex 753 Drivell Feedback 2 0 REAL PowerFlex 753 Drive l StopModeA c DINT My PowerFlex 753 Drive l StopModeB c DINT My PowetFlex 753 Diive LAccelTimel 2 0 REAL My PowerFlex 753 Drive AccelTime2 0 0 REAL My PowerFlex 753 Drive DecelTimel 0 0 REAL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l DecelTime2 2 0 REAL PowerFlex 753 Drivell Jog amp ccDecTime 2 0 REAL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive JogSpeedi 0 0 My 753 DrivelJogSpeed2 c c REAL My_PowerFlex_753_Drive l PresetSpeedl 2 0 REAL My_PowerFlex_753_Driverl
286. twork Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 79 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 Additional information may also be displayed on the HIM if it is present upgrade status and so forth If ADC is unsuccessful the NET A status indicator will be flashing green or off and RSLogix 5000 software can be used to get additional information When online the drive at issue should have a yellow triangle Q next to it in the RSLogix 5000 project s I O Configuration folder Double click the drive to open the Drive AOP The Connection tab will show a Module Fault code and the Drive tab will identify issues to the Port level ADC Status Field Description Running Any desired configuration is complete and the 1 0 connection is running Configuring ADC is currently updating the configuration of the drive or one of its peripherals Clicking the Connection tab will show which device is being updated Firmware Updating ADC is currently updating the firmware of the drive or one of its peripherals Clicking the Drive tab will show which device is being updated Inhibited The program has the connection inhibited You can uninhibit the connection on the Connection tab Faulted A problem is preventing the controller from connecting to the drive for example the device at the IP address provided is not a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Clicking the Connection tab will show the cause Module Fault Clicking the Drive tab may also
287. u can use option module Device Parameter 03 DLs From Net Act to check the total number of Datalinks being used Word 0 is Logic Command Word 1 is Speed Reference Word 2 is DL From Net 01 and so forth see Figure 14 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Configuringthel O Chapter 4 For the example in this manual all 16 Host DL From Net xx and all 16 Host DL To Net xx are used resulting in an Input Size of 19 and an Output Size of 18 7 After setting the information in the drive s New Module dialog box click OK The Module Properties dialog box appears 8 Click the Connection tab E Module Properties Report ENETR ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval 10 0 ms 1 0 32000 ms Inhibit Module Major Faut On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode v Use Unicast Connection over Ethe Net IP Module Fault 9 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 2 0 milliseconds or greater default is 20 0 milliseconds This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the option module To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices The Inhibit Module box when checked inhibits the module from communicating with the RSLogix 5000 project When the Major Fault On box is checked a major contr
288. uld equal a Reference of 30 0 Hz If Parameter 300 is set to RPM a 32 bit REAL Reference value of 1020 5 would equal a Reference of 1020 5 RPM Note that the commanded maximum speed can never exceed the value of drive Parameter 520 Max Fwd Speed Table 4 shows example References and their results for a PowerFlex 750 Series drive that has its Parameter 300 Speed Units set to Hz Parameter 37 Maximum Freq set to 130 Hz Parameter 520 Max Fwd Speed set to 60 Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 89 Chapter5 Using the 1 0 Adapter mode only Using Datalinks 90 When Parameter 300 Speed Units is set to RPM the other parameters are also in RPM Table 4 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Example Speed Reference Feedback Scaling Network Reference Value Speed Command Value 2 Output Speed Network Feedback Value 130 0 130 Hz 60 uz 9 60 0 65 0 65 Hz 60 uz 9 60 0 32 5 32 5 Hz 32 5 Hz 32 5 0 0 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 0 3250 325Hz 32 5 Hz 32 5 1 The effects of values less than 0 0 depend on whether the PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses a bipolar or unipolar direction mode See the drive documentation for details 2 For this example drive Parameter 300 Speed Units is set to Hz The drive runs at 60 Hz instead of 130 Hz or 65 Hz because drive Parameter 520 Max Fwd Speed sets 60 Hz as the maximum speed A Datalink is a mechanism used by PowerFlex d
289. uly 2012 43 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module 4 Set Device Parameter 32 Fr Peer Timeout to a suitable timeout value for your application This value should be greater than the product of Device Parameter 41 To Peer Period and Device Parameter 42 To Peer Skip in the transmitting drive 5 Set Host Parameter 35 Peer Flt Action to the desired action if peer I O data is not received before the timeout is reached Peer Flt Action lets you determine the action of the option module and connected drive if the option module is unable to communicate with the designated peer By default this parameter faults the drive You may configure this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a hazard of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Host Parameter 35 Value Description 0 Fauit Defaulty 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Flt Cfg For more details about fault action see Setting a Fault Action Adapter mode only on page 46 6 Set Device Parameters 33 Fr Peer Addr 1 through 36 Fr Peer Addr 4 to the IP address of the drive transmitting the custom peer I O IP Address of Node Transmitting Custo
290. urable alarm condition exists but the drive continues to run Red Flashing A major fault has occurred Drive will stop Drive cannot be started until fault condition is cleared Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Red Flashing A minor fault has occurred Use drive parameter 950 Minor Flt Yellow Alternately Config to enable If not enabled acts like a major fault When running the drive continues to run System is brought to a stop under System control The fault must be cleared to continue Yellow Flashing When running a type 1 alarm exists Green Alternately Green Red Flashing Drive is updating Alternately Option Module Status Indicators Adapter Mode PORT Green Flashing Normal operation The option module is establishing an 1 0 connection to the drive It will turn steady green or red Steady Normal operation The option module is properly connected and communicating with the drive MOD Green Flashing Normal operation The option module is operating but is not transferring 1 0 data to a controller Steady Normal operation The option module is operating and transferring 1 0 data to a controller NETA Unlit Off Normal operation DHCP is enabled or a valid IP address is not set Green Flashing Normal operation DHCP is disabled the option module is properly connected has an IP address and is connected to an EtherNet IP network but does not have an 1 0 connection
291. ures Diagnostic Overview Network Settings e Network interface details such as IP address and subnet mask Ethernet interface configuration method e Ethernet port details Ethernet Statistics Ethernet counters e Ethernet port details e Error information Ring Statistics Ring supervisor configuration and fault details 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Appendix A Specifications This appendix presents the specifications for the option module Topic Page Communication 137 Electrical 138 Mechanical 138 Environmental 138 Regulatory Compliance 138 Communication This section contains communication specifications for the option module Adapter and Tap modes of operation When Operating in Adapter Mode Network Protocol Data Rates Connection Limits EtherNet IP 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex or 100 Mbps Half Duplex 30 TCP connections 16 simultaneous explicit messaging connections plus one exclusive owner 1 0 connection The following activities use a CIP connection Class 11 0 connections for example from a ControlLogix controller Explicit messaging where connected is chosen for example in a checkbox in RSLogix 5000 software DriveExecutive connections to the drive The following activities do not use a CIP connection Explicit messaging based control using PCCC or the Register or Assembly obje
292. used to access the option module parameters Tool See PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM page 32 BOOTP Server or DHCP server page 32 DriveExplorer Software http www ab com drives driveexplorer or version 6 01 or later DriveExplorer online help installed with the software DriveExecutive Software http www ab com drives drivetools or version 5 01 or later DriveExecutive online help installed with the software IMPORTANT _ For the HIM screens shown throughout this chapter the option module was installed in drive Port 4 If your option module is installed in a different drive port that port would appear instead of Port 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 31 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Using the PowerFlex 20 HIM If your drive has an enhanced PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM it A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM to Access Parameters Setting the Option Module Node Address 32 can be used to access parameters in the option module 1 Display the Status screen which is shown on HIM powerup 2 Use the or DEB key to scroll to the Port in which the option module is installed 3 Press the PAR soft key to display the Jump to Param entry pop up box 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the desired parameter number or use or soft key to scroll to the desired parameter number For details on viewing and editing parameters see the PowerFlex 20
293. ves to an EtherNet IP network Option modules are sometimes also called adapters cards embedded communication options and peripherals On PowerFlex 750 Series drives option modules can also be I O modules encoder modules safety modules and so forth PCCC is the protocol used by some controllers to communicate with devices on a network Some software products for example DriveExplorer software and DriveExecutive software also use PCCC to communicate An option module that is configured for a peer to peer hierarchy can exchange data with a device on the network that is not a scanner This type of hierarchy can be set up so that a scanner configures or transmits data to one PowerFlex 750 Series drive which then sends the same configuration or data to other PowerFlex 750 Series drives on the network To use a peer to peer hierarchy you configure one option module to transmit data and one or more option modules to receive the data A message that is sent on the network to determine if a node exists Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series drives are part of the PowerFlex 7 Class family of drives The Reference is used to send a setpoint for example speed frequency torque to the drive It consists of one 32 bit word of output to the option module from the network Feedback is used to monitor the speed of the drive It consists of one 32 bit word of input from the option module to the network RSLogix 5000 softwa
294. well Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Adapter Mode TCP IP Configuration Web Page Viewing Option Module Web Pages Chapter 8 The Adapter mode TCP IP Configuration web page provides information about the option module s Ethernet settings and network activities To view this web page click the TCP IP configuration link highlighted in Figure 40 in the navigation pane Figure 40 Example of Adapter Mode TCP IP Configuration Web Page 2 Rockwell Automation Windows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation e Rodoret automason Allen Bradley 19 Rockwell Automation Expand Minimize TCP IP Configuratio Process display TCP IP configuration Configure e mail notificz i Browse DPI devices Online user manuals Software tools Web sits Launch my DriveExplore f Launch my DriveExecutr E mail technical support Information Description IP Address IP address of the option module Subnet Mask Subnet mask for the option module s network Gateway Address Address for the gateway device on the option module s network BOOTP DHCP Shows status for BOOTP DHCP which may be used to configure the option module s network information Ethernet Address MAC Hardware address for the option module Ethernet Receive Overruns Number of packets that the option module has received in excess Ethernet Received Packets Number of packets that the
295. will not generate a fault to indicate that the event queue was corrupted Resetting the option module to defaults has no effect on the event queue other than to log a Code 58 Module Defaulted event Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation If you encounter unexpected communication problems the events may help you or Allen Bradley personnel troubleshoot the problem The following events may appear in the event queue 122 Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Troubleshooting Table 12 Option Module Events Chapter 7 Code Event Text Description Option Module Events 1 No Event Text displayed in an empty event queue entry 2 Device Power Up Power was applied to the option module 3 Device Reset The option module was reset 4 EEPROM CRC Error The EEPROM checksum CRC is incorrect which limits option module functionality Default parameter values must be loaded to clear this condition 5 App Updated The option module application firmware was updated 6 Boot Updated The option module boot firmware was updated 7 Watchdog Timeout The software watchdog detected a failure and reset the option module DPI Events 8 DPI Bus Off A bus off condition was detected on DPI 9 DPI Ping Timeout A ping message was not received on DPI within the specified time 10 DPI Port Invalid The option module was not
296. with the option module and connected PowerFlex drive For information on using a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller see Controller Examples for EtherNet IP Network Communications with PowerFlex 750 Series Drives publication 750COM AT001 Topic Page Using RSLinx Classic Software 53 Uploading the Electronic Data Sheet EDS File 54 ControlLogix Controller Example Adapter mode only 54 RSLinx Classic software in all its variations Lite Gateway OEM and so forth is used to provide a communication link between the computer network and controller RSLinx Classic software requires its network specific driver to be configured before communication is established with network devices To configure the RSLinx driver follow this procedure 1 Start RSLinx Classic software 2 From the Communications menu choose Configure Drivers to display the Configure Drivers dialog box 3 From the Available Driver Types pull down menu choose EtherNet IP Driver 4 Click Add New to display the Add New RSLinx Driver dialog box 5 Use the default name or type a name 6 Click OK The Configure driver dialog box appears 7 Depending on your application select either the browse local or remote subnet option 8 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 53 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 Uploading the Electronic Data Sheet EDS File ControlLogix Controller Examp
297. work link but no activity No action required Flashing Green ENET1 network port has a 100 Mbps network link with activity No action required Steady Yellow ENET1 network port has a 10 Mbps network link but no activity No action required ENET1 network port has a 10 Mbps network link with activity Flashing Yellow 116 No action required Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 LINK 2 Status Indicator Tap Mode This green yellow bicolor LED indicates the status of the ENET2 network port as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The option module is not properly connected to the network Securely connect the option module to the network using an Ethernet cable Also make sure the Ethernet cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet connector Steady Green ENET2 network port has a 100 Mbps network link but no activity No action required Flashing Green ENET2 network port has a 100 Mbps network link with activity No action required Steady Yellow ENET2 network port has a 10 Mbps network link but no activity No action required Flashing Yellow ENET2 network port has a 10 Mbps network link with activity No action required LINK 3 Status Indicator Tap Mode This green yellow LED indicates the status of the ENET3 DEVICE network port as shown in the table below Status Cause
298. x At Zero Speed 0 Not at Zero Speed At Zero Speed xX At Home 0 Not at At Home x At Limit 0 Not at Limit At Limit X Current Limit 0 Not at Current Limit At Current Limit x Bus Freq Reg 0 Not Bus Freq Reg Bus Freq Reg X Enable On 0 Not Enable On Enable On x Motor Overload 0 Not Motor Overload Motor Overload x Regen 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 750C0M UMO08A EN P July 2012 0 Not Regen Regen ADC Automatic Device Configuration BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol Bridge CIP Common Industrial Protocol ControlFLASH Controller Data Rate Datalinks Glossary The following terms and abbreviations are used throughout this manual For definitions of terms not listed here see the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG 7 1 An RSLogix 5000 software version 20 00 or later feature that supports the automatic download of configuration data upon the Logix controller establishing an EtherNet IP network connection to a PowerFlex 750 Series drive firmware revision 4 001 or later and its associated peripherals BOOTP lets the option module configure itself dynamically at restart if the network has a BOOTP server The BOOTP server assigns the option module a preconfigured IP address a subnet m
299. y default values This is the same as pressing the ALL soft key when using the MEMORY folder method described in Restoring Option Module Parameters to Factory Defaults on page 50 After performing a Set Defaults you must enter 1 Reset Module or power cycle the drive so that the new values take effect Thereafter this parameter will be restored to a value of 0 Ready IMPORTANT When operating the option module in Tap mode Host parameters are NOT supported so only Device parameters are reset to their factory default values IMPORTANT When performing a Set Defaults the drive may detect a conflict and then not allow this function to occur If this happens first resolve the conflict and then repeat a Set Defaults action Common reasons for a conflict include the drive running or a controller in Run mode TIP If your application allows you can also reset the option module by cycling power to the drive resetting the drive or by using the Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder Rockwell Automation Publication 750COM UMO08A EN P July 2012 49 Chapter3 Configuring the Option Module Restoring Option Module Parameters to Factory Defaults 50 As an alternate reset method you can restore the option module parameters by usinga MEMORY folder menu item instead of using Device Parameter 25 Reset Module described in Resetting the Option Module on page 49 The MEMORY folder method provides

750COM-UM008 - Literature Library

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents